Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
20100211 Project Manual 10262010
tgba ~ architects t 425.778.1530 21911 76th Ave. W Suite 210 f 425.774.7803 Edmonds, WA 98026 1 1 1 t ba g architects t 425.778.1530 21911 76th Ave. W Suite 210 f 425.774.7803 Edmonds, WA 98026 PROVIDENCE TIMESHARE CLINIC YELM MOB Yelm, WA Project #080fi2 PROJECT MANUAL ~~~~ ., .:~. BY: -------------------- tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT General Conditions of the Contract AIA A-201 SPECIFICATIONS Division 01 --General Requirements 01 1000 - Summary of the Work 01 1421 -Alteration Procedures 01 2613 -Requests for Information 01 3101 -CAD Data Release Agreement 01 3113 -Project Coordination 01 3119 -Project Meetings 01 3216 -Construction Progress Schedule 01 3300 -Submittals 01 4000 -Quality Requirements 01 4100 -Regulatory Requirements 01 5000 -Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01 6000 -Product Requirements 01 7000 -Closeout Procedures 01 7123 -Field Engineering 01 7329 -Cutting and Patching 01 7413 -Progress Cleaning 01 7423 -Final Cleaning 01 7823 -Operation and Maintenance Data 01 7836 -Warranties and Bonds 01 9000 -Material Color and Pattern Standards Division 02 -Existing Conditions 02 4100 -Selective Demolition Division 03 -Concrete 03 5415 - Cementitions Floor Underlayment Division 04 --Masonry Division 05 --Metals Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and Composites Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 06 1000 -Rou h C r t g pen ry a 06 2000 -Finish Carpentry 06 4100 -Architectural Wood Casework 06 6116 -Solid Surface Material 06 6400 -Solid Polymer Fabrications Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 08 --Openings 08 1213 -Hollow Metal Frames 08 1416 -Flush Wood Doors 08 3100 -Access Doors and Panels 08 7100 -Door Hardware O8 8000 -Glass and Glazing Division 09 -- Finishes 09 2116 -G sum Board S stems yp y 09 5100 -Acoustical Ceilings 09 6500 -Resilient Flooring 09 6800 -Carpeting 09 9000 -Painting and Coating w~ Division 10 --Specialties 10 1400 - Signage 10 2601 -Wall and Corner Guards 10 2800 -Toilet Accessories 10 4400 -Fire Protection Specialties Division 11 -- Equipment 11 9010 -Equipment Division 12 -- Furnishings Division 13 --Special Construction Division 14 --Conveying Equipment Division 21 --Fire Su ression pp 21 0000 -Fire Protection Piping (Design/Build) Division 22 --Plumbing 22 0000 -Plumbing (Design/Build) Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 0000 -HVAC (Design/Build) 20 October 2010 00 0110 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 Division 26 -- Electrical 26 0000 -Electrical (Design/build) Division 27 -Communications Division 28 --Electronic Safety and Security Appendix A. Equipment and Lighting Cut Sheets END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 00 0110 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB w 1 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY OF THE WORK 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project: 1. Interior build-out of a 2,987SF Timeshare Clinic for Providence St. Peter's Hospital in the Yelm Medical Office Building. Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm Medical Office Building 201 Tahoma Blvd SE Suite 204 Yelm, WA 98597 B. Tenant Providence Health System 413 Lily Road NE Olympia, WA 98506 Telephone: (360) 493-7194 Fax: (360) 493-4367 C. Architect's Name: TGBa 21911 76th Avenue West Suite 210 Edmonds, WA 98026 Telephone: (425) 778-1530 Fax: (425) 774-7803 D. Contractor's Name: Aldrich + Associates 810 240th Street SE Bothell, WA 98021 Telephone: (425) 4$3-1313 Fax: (425) 669-2187 E. Commencement of Work: Start of work by Contractor indicates that he has fully familiarized himself with requirements of the work. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the agreement between Owner and Contractor and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 WORK SAFETY A. Comply with all safety orders required by the local and federal authorities. 1 B. Provide additional safety measures as necessary to reasonably protect employees and the public from unnecessary dangers at all times for the duration of the Work. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. 1. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have unlimited use of the premises for construction operations, including use of the site. a. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored on site. 20 October 2010 01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB b. Move any stored products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of the Owner or separate contractor. c. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations. d. Delivery and storage of materials shall be confined to the area designated by the Owner and subject to fire and safety requirements. e. Delivery of materials for construction and loading of debris for removal from the site shall not interfere with the Owner's operations. Owner will not accept deliveries for Contractor. f. Care shall be taken during delivery or removal of material to avoid damage to existing facilities. Should such damage occur due to Contractor's operations, repairs shall be made to restore facilities to their original condition without cost to the Owner. B. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. a. Construction personnel shall not park in any Owner parking lots except where designated by the Owner. b. Violators do so at their own risk and may have their vehicle ticketed/towed. c. The Owner will designate parking areas. C. Emergency Exits 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. D. Time Restrictions: 1. Work Hours: Work times shall conform to the ordinances and requirements of the local City, County or local jurisdiction having authority E. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied. 2. The time required for such interruption shall be held to a minimum and all connections, testing and closures completed during this approved time period. 3. It may be required that such work be performed at times other than the Contractor's regular working hours. 4. Work requiring interruption of any utility or support system shall be performed so as to cause no risk to the personal safety of patients, staff or Owner's personnel within the Owner'5 facility. 5. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.05 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. List of Owner Furnished Items: A complete list of all Owner furnished items must be submitted to the Architect within seven (7) days of written Notice to Proceed. The list must also state the date when each of the items must be delivered to the Contractor. B. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers: The Contractor will furnish to the Architect a complete list of the names and business phone and fax numbers of all its project subcontractors. C. Additional Schedule Items: The Contractor's project schedule will be detailed by phase, and will include additional line items for: 1. Owner installation of utilities and equipment. 2. Special testing, inspections or certifications. 3. Punchlist" completion. 20 October 2010 01 1000 - 2 SUMMARY OF THE WORK tgba -Project #08062.02 PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 01 1000 - 3 SUMMARY OF THE WORK tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 1421 ALTERATION PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. This section includes the administrative and procedural requirements for the general alterations of the project. Including but not limited to products, transition and adjustments, cutting, patching, and repair and cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Section 01 5000 -Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed ormoisture-resistant element 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time the Work will be executed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing Products where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. D. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation work. Replace and 20 October 2010 01 1421 - 1 ALTERATION PROCEDURES tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Provide new materials as specified for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper instaiVation of new work and finishes. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. Provide structural calculations demonstrating the adequacy of temporary supports if considered warranted or requested by Owner orjurisdiction having authority. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion. B. Project: Complete in all respects including operational mechanical and electrical work. C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage. Provide a means of reskoring products and finishes to original or specified condition and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive new and repair finish. D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and electrical systems to full original operational condition. F. Install Products as specified in individual Sections. G. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. H. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. 1. Concrete walls; Saw-cut walls with diamond saw. Cut in accurately located straight lines, unless directed otherwise. Saw both sides of wall and break out remainder, minimize overcuts. 2. Masonry Walls: Saw-cut along mortarjoints, cutting block uniformly in straight lines at accurate locations, unless otherwise directed. Remove all mortar adhering to edges. Overcuts not allowed. 3. Wood framed walls: Breakout plaster or gypsum wallboard in accurate locations, removing wall framing as required. Cut wall finish materials in straight uniform lines. 4. Concrete floors: Saw-cut floors in accurate locations and breakout. Core-drill for corings. J. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. K. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. L. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material to full thickness of the penetrated element. Replace existing firestopping when disturbed by new construction. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 1421 - 2 ALTERATION PROCEDURES tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 2613 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures related to Requests for Information. B. Related Sections: Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract: Procedures related to changes in the Work. 1.02 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) PROCEDURES A, Requests for interpretation of the requirements of content of the Contract Documents, or for approval of a variation from the Contract Documents, shall be submitted to the Architect. 1. Submit requests only on form approved by the Architect. Architect's standard form is included herein to establish level of quality and required information. 2. Include all information necessary for the Architect to evaluate the requests. Incomplete forms and those that are unclear or inadequately documented will be returned to the Contractor for completion or clarification. 3. Submit requests to the Architect. No requests will be accepted from Subcontractors, suppliers, or others except through the Contractor. 4. Submit RFI's in a timely manner. Timing of submittal of RFI's and those anticipating a change of Contract Sum or Contract Time shall allow for adequate review period and for Contractor's submittal and Architect's review of cost and time proposals subsequent to the RFI response. 5. Should the RFI require material or equipment not specified, submit substitution request in compliance with Section 01 6000. B. Submit one copy of the RFI request form covering each individual request. 1. Complete the form accurately and in full. 2. Assign sequential numbers to RFI's; maintain a log. RFI's that are resubmitted shall have a suffix numeral "1"added to the number. Subsequent resubmittals to be the next higher number. 3. If the request has a potential impact on Contract Sum or Time, provide specifics in the space provided. If impact depends on the Architect's response, check "yes" in the space provided, and explain. 4. Requests for variation from Contract Documents wilt be considered only if there is a benefit to the Owner in terms of reduction in costs and time, or improvement in quality, performance, maintenance, coordination or other identifiable consideration. 5. Drawings and other explanations may be attached to the request, if so they must be clearly identified and referenced in the request. C. Response by the Owner and Architect will be to the specific request as received and is not to be interpreted to extend beyond the specifics of the request. D. Normal turnaround time for response to RFI's shall be five working days. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED 20 October 2010 01 2613 - 1 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION tgba -Project #08062.02 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFf) PROJECT: RFI Providence Timeshare Clinic Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB No. TGBA Project number: Date Submitted: 08062 ' TO: Total pages sent: Gina Dais TGBA Date Response Requested: gdais@tgbarchitects.com FROM: Aldrich + Associates 1. Contractor requests approval for variation of Contract Documents. Description: 2. Describe how the Owner would benefit from the requested variation. _yes ,no 3. Is there any impact on Contract Sum? If Yes, Order of magnitude cost 4. Is there any impact on Project Schedule? If Yes, Order of magnitude cost estimate RESPONSE: _yes _no _yes _no ^ f By: Date: Attachments: Total pages sent: CCD Required: _yes _no CCD Issued: CCD No.: Date: ' This response does not authorize any work requiring a change in the Contract Sum or Contract Schedule. Any such change requires a Construction Change Directive (CCD) and/or an approved Change Order. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 2613 - 2 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 'I u t ri 1 1 SECTION 01 3101 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION CAD DATA RELEASE AGREEMENT A. Contractor shall be provided with CAD data for Contractor's use in verification and in preparing shop drawings upon request. B. Contractor agrees to the requirements set forth in Part 2 regarding acquisition and use of CAD data provided by TGBA. 1.02 OWNERSHIP OF DATA A. CAD data files are Instruments of Service as set forth in the Agreement between Owner and TGBA and remain the property of TGBA. TGBA shall remain the exclusive holder of all copyrights and releases CAD data only for the express purpose of prosecuting the completion of this project. PART 2 AGREEMENT 2.01 SPECIFIC TERMS A. TGBA agrees to release CAD data for Contractor's use subject to the following Terms of Use: 1. TGBA provides CAD data "as is" and with all faults. 2. TGBA specifically disclaims any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for neither a particular use nor warrants that the information is completely accurate or error free. 3. Information contained in transferred or transmitted CAD data is subject to change without notice. 4. The logo and title block of TGBA is copyrighted and cannot be used or further disseminated without express permission of TGBA. B. Acceptance and use of TGBA-provide CAD data constitutes acceptance of these terms. C. TGBA shall refuse requests for transference of CAD data at its own discretion. D. Transmitted CAD data may be purpose-developed and shall be considered accurate only for the intended trade or trades requesting the data. 2.02 RELEASE OF LIABILITY A. The recipient releases and/or waives any liability for these electronic files or claims against TGBA, its employees, agents, or successors, in any situation arising from the use of these electronic files. The recipient agrees to indemnify and hold harmless TGBA for any claim alleged, asserted or adjudged against TGBA by any other party in any situation arising from the use of these electronic files. 2.03 FORMAT AND TRANSFER A. TGBA shall make all reasonable effort to accommodate CAD requirements of contractor but shall not rework, redraw or reconfigure existing CAD data without express written agreement of Owner. TGBA ' shall at its own discretion discern whether fees for additional services are required to accommodate Contractor's CAD data request. ' B. Transference of files shall be electronic, at TGBA's discretion through its own means. C. TGBA requests that CAD data requests be made in number to maximize its efforts in processing CAD data. END OF SECTION ' 20 October 2010 01 3101 - 1 CAD DATA RELEASE AGREEMENT tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB II L~ 1 1 SECTION 01 3113 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. PROJECT COORDINATION B. Administrative and supervisory personnel. C. General installation provisions. D. Cleaning and protection. 1.02 COORDINATION A. Arrange all work so that it does not interfere with Owner's activities. Notify the Owner in writing a minimum of 72 hours in advance of all utility shutdowns proposed by the Contractor. Obtain the Owner's written approval prior to proceeding with work. B. Coordinate activities included in various Sections to assure efficient and orderly installation of each component. Coordinate operations included under different Sections that are dependent on each other for proper installation and operation. C. All trades shall be fit tested and approved for access to restricted areas during the abatement phase of this work. During abatement, proper coordination shall occur between all trades to insure adequate demolition, modification and abatement while area is in containment. D. Where installation of one component depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation, schedule activities in sequence required to obtain best results. E. Where space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for maintenance, service and repair. F. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. G. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining required coordination procedures. 1. Include required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 2. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. H. Phasing: Refer to Section 01 1000 for construction phasing requirements. I. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. J. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing ' in service such equipment. K. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. L. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. M. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate sections in preparation for substantial 20 October 2010 01 3113 - 1 PROJECT COORDINATION tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB completion and for portions of work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. N. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with contract documents to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES A. Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress. 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Permits, inspections and approvals by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Project close-out activities. B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where close coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show relationship of components shown on separate shop drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Divisions 22 through 26 respectively for requirements unique to plumbing, HVAC and electrical installations. C. Staff Names: 1. Submit a list of Contractor's and Subcontractor's personnel at site; identify key individuals, addresses, telephone numbers, fax numbers and emergency contact list. 2. Post copies in field office and at each temporary telephone. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspection of Conditions: Ensure that Installer of each component inspects substrate and conditions under which Work is performed. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Inspect material immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Re-check measurements and dimensions before starting installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations to extent that they are more stringent than requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing each construction element. 1. Secure each construction element true to line and level. 2. Allow for expansion and building movement. C. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints to obtain best effect. Refer questionable choices to Architect for decision. D. Install each component during weather conditions and project status that will ensure best results. E. Isolate each part from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. 20 October 2010 01 3113 - 2 PROJECT COORDINATION ~ ~ tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB F. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests to minimize uncovering completed construction for that purpose. G. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install components at standard heights for application indicated. Refer questionable decisions to Architect. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and maintain completed construction as often as necessary through construction period. C. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. D. All dirt, dust and debris which migrates from work area to adjacent roads, planters, buildings, parked vehicles, etc. must be cleaned and maintained as required to remain clean and useable by the general public and staff. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 3113 - 3 PROJECT COORDINATION tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB u t i 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-construction conference B. Site mobilization conference C. Pre-installation conferences D. Progress Meetings E. Reporting 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SECTION 01 3119 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Contractor will schedule a conference after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Owner's Representative, Architect, General Contractor, Project Manager and Site Superintendent. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of contract documents. 3. Submission of subcontractors list, a list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in contract, and the Architect. 5. Sequence of Project Meetings. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, application for payments, proposal request, change orders and contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 1.03 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A. Contractor will schedule a conference at the project site prior to occupancy. II B. Attendance Required: Owner, Owner Representative, Architect, Special Consultants, Contractor's Project Manager, Superintendent, and Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda to be developed by the Contractor. 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Contractor. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Procedures for testing. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 10. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 12. Schedule job site meetings/progress meetings. 1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual Specification Section, convene aPre-installation Conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. 20 October 2010 01 3119 - 1 PROJECT MEETINGS t ba -P t #0806 ' g rojec 2.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. ' C. Notify Architect or Owner Representative four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda, preside at Conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days after i~ Conference to participants, with two copies to Architect. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. 1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Progress meetings will be conducted at appropriate intervals at the jobsite, as determined at the , Preconstruction Conference. Prepare agenda and provide meeting minutes. Record significant discussions, agreements, and disagreements of each conference, along with approved schedule. 1. Number and record meetings sequentially. B. Attendees: Owner's Representative, Architect, Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendent. At Contractor's discretion, also include any subcontractors deemed appropriate for current construction activities. ' C. Agenda: To be developed by the Contractor. Review minutes of previous progress meeting for truthfulness and unresolved items recorded. Review significant items that could affect progress. Include topics appropriate to the current status of the Project. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress and updated construction schedule since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to Contractor's original construction schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the contract time. E R , . eview present and future needs of each entity present: 1. Schedule 2. Requests for Information 3. ASI, CCD, PR 4. Submittals 5. Change Orders 6. Documentation of information for payment requests. 7. Others as determined by Owner's Representative, Architect, and/or Consultant 8. Other items, as determined by the Contractor 1.06 REPORTING A. Distribute meeting record to all concerned parties, including Owner and Architect, within 48 hours after meeting. B. Distribute one copy of minutes to each party present, and to parties who should have been present or who should have information contained in minutes as determined by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED ' PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 3119 - 2 PROJECT MEETINGS tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 3216 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Monthly Updates and Short Interval Schedules. The purpose of the schedules and reports is to: 1. Ensure adequate planning and execution of the work by the Contractor. 2. Establish the standard against which satisfactory completion of the project shall be judged. 3. Assist the Owner's Representative in monitoring progress. 4. Assess the impact of any changes to the Contract. 5. Support the basis for progress payments. B. Float is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of an activity or chain of activities on the 'Critical Path Method' (CPM) construction schedule. Float is not for the exclusive use of either the Contractor or the Owner unless otherwise identified in the Contract Documents. Extensions of time for Contract performance will be granted only to the extent that equitable time adjustments to the affected activity or activities exceed the total float time along the affected paths of the currently approved CPM at the time Notice to Proceed was issued for the change. C. All schedule submittals, including schedule updates, will be reviewed jointly by the Owner's Representative and the Contractor. Such review of the Contractor's schedules shall not constitute an approval or acceptance of the Contractor's construction means, methods, or sequencing or its ability to complete the Work in a timely manner. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare and submit a final construction schedule within (5) seven calendar days after receipt of review comments on the preliminary construction schedule. B. Prepare and submit a 4 week short interval schedule weekly. ' C. Maintain schedule on-site and update weekly in red ink. If a schedule is revised make a copy of previous schedule with updates marked in red and deliver to Owner's Representative at time of revision. 1.03 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Schedule: Prepare a project schedule by Critical Path Method (CPM) as approved. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, including but not limited to: 1. Date for Notice to Proceed; 2. Date for Substantial Completion; 3. Shop Drawing submittals and approvals; 4. Work activities; 5. Material ordering and delivery to job site; 6. Utility shutdowns, road closures, etc. 7. Intermediate completion dates, if applicable; 8. Owner relocation of contents, if applicable; 9. Show interrelationships and dependencies; 10. Indicate critical path of activities. 11. Testing, commissioning and other close out activities. B. Short Interval Schedule: Prepare and update weekly a 4 week interval schedule. Show one (1) week of actual progress (planned vs actual performance). Forecast three (3) weeks of start and completion dates for each activity, task or event in comparison to the prepared schedule. 1. Activities in interval schedule shall relate directly to activities in the construction schedule. 20 October 2010 01 3216 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 2. Copies of the Short Interval Schedule shah be provided at the weekly progress meetings and wi11 t be used as a basis for discussion of progress and of planned work at the meetings. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REVISIONS A. Show changes occurring since previous schedule submission, such as: 1. Any major changes in scope; 2. Activities modified since previous submission; 3. Revised projections for progress and completion, as applicable; 4. Any other identifiable changes. B. Provide narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delay, and impact of these on schedule; 2. Corrective action recommended and its effect 3.02 UPDATES ' A. At each progress meeting discuss the interval schedule. Any deviation from the planned schedule shall be explained by Contractor, with corrective measures to bring the progress of the Work back in line with the planned schedule. B. Indicate progress of the Work at each construction progress meeting by drawing a vertical line down the schedule to represent work completed to date. 3.03 SUBMITTAL A. Submit a copy of the schedule to Owner's Representative for review. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days B. Submit revised construction schedule with each application for payment, or as directed by Owner's Representative. 3.04 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Aldrich + Associates's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, TGBa, Providence Health System, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 3216 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1 1 n t 1 t tgba -Project #08062.02 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTALS Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work. B. Proposed products list. C. Construction progress schedules. D. Submittals schedule. E. Product data. F. Shop drawings. G. Samples. H. Review action. Schedule of Submittal Categories. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittal Processing: Affow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of time required to process submittals, including time for re-submittals. 1. Allow two weeks for initial review. a. Allow more time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. Architect will advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. c. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process same as initial submittal. d. Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal. e. No extension of Contract time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. f. No extension of Contract time will be authorized due to incorrect and resubmitted submittals. C. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate name of entity that prepared submittal. 1. Provide 4-inch by 5-inch space on label or beside title block on shop drawings to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken. 2. Provide an additional 3-inch by 4-inch space adjacent to Contractor's review/approval space to record action taken during processing by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name and Architect's project number. 20 October 2010 01 3300 - 1 SUBMITTALS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB b. Date that submittal is forwarded to Contractor. c. Name, address and telephone number of Architect. d. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor. e. Name, address and telephone number of Sub-contractor. f. Name, address and telephone number of Supplier. g. Name, address and telephone number Manufacturer. h. Number and title of applicable specification section and fist of specification in submittal. i. Anticipated lead time, delivery method and date of delivery to job site. j. Reference Drawing sheet, detail numbers and/or specification section applicable to submittal. k. Submittal number. Provide sequential, chronological numbering systems for all submittals from subcontractors. D. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. a. Transmit each submittal to Architect using transmittal form. b. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be returned without action. c. Record on transmittal form relevant information and requests for data. 1) Record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 2) Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. d. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810, or Contractor's form meeting approval of Architect. 1.03 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS LIST A. Within five calendar days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of subcontractors and vendors proposed for use. B. List Company name, contact person, address, telephone and fax numbers for each subcontractor and vendor. 1.04 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, schedule of values, list of products, and construction schedule. B. Prepare submittal schedule in CSI order. Include approximate dates of submittal. C. Provide following information: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Related Section number. 3. Name of subcontractor. 4. Description of part of Work covered. 5. Scheduled date for re-submittal. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. D. Distribution: 1. Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to Architect, Owner, Owner's Representative, Sub-contractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. 2. Post copies in project meeting room and field office. 3. When revisions are made, distribute to same parties and post in same locations. 4. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. E. Schedule Updating: Revise schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recognized or made, and issue updated schedule with meeting report. 20 October 2010 01 3300 - 2 SUBMITTALS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 i 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect product data into single submittal for each system or element of construction. 1. Product data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. 2. Where product data must be specially prepared, submit as shop drawings. 3. Do not submit product data until compliance with requirements of Contract Documents has been confirmed. B. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. C. Where printed product data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. D. Include the following information: 1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 4. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 6. Notation of coordination requirements. E. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary, single copy of product data where selection of options is required. F. Number of Copies: 1. Four copies except where otherwise indicated. Architect will retain one, and will return others marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. 2. Where Required for Maintenance Manuals: Four copies. Architect will retain one, and will return others marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and other parties involved in required performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of product data is in installer's possession. 2. Do not use unmarked copies of product data in connection with construction. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. B. Highlight, encircle (cloud), or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. In same manner, indicate any changes, revisions or unknowns with a note requesting information or verification. C. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of shop drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to this project is not considered shop drawings and will be rejected. D. Shop drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates, and similar drawings. E. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. F. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings, submit shop drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 20 October 2010 01 3300 - 3 SUBMITTALS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB G. Number of Copies: 1. Initial Submittal: Submit two correctable reproducible prints. One reproducible print will be returned. H. Do not use shop drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. Review all shop drawings prior to submittal to Architect. Check shop drawings for conformance with the Contract Documents, and coordination with other elements and trades for the Project. After review, place an approval stamp on each shop drawing prior to transmitting to the Architect. Any shop drawings not conforming to the Contract Documents and above requirements will be returned to the Contractor without comment or action. No extension of Contract time will be authorized due to incorrect or incomplete shop drawings. 1.0.7 SAMPLES A. Place a permanent identification label or title block on each sample submitted. Indicate project name; supplier's name and telephone number; specification section number, product name, size(s), color, finish, etc. to be used. B. Submit full-size, fully fabricated samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical to material or product proposed. Place a permanent label or title block on each sample for identification. Indicate size(s), color, finish, etc., to be used. C. Include following: 1. Generic description. 2. Source. 3. Product name or name of manufacturer. 4. Compliance with recognized standards. 5. Availability and delivery time. D. Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Where variations in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristics are inherent in material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than three) that show approximate limits of variations. 2. Refer to other specification sections for requirements for samples that illustrate workmanship fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. E. Number of Samples: 1. Preliminary Submittal for Selection of Color, Pattern, Texture, or the like: Submit full set of choices for material or product. Samples will be returned with Architect's mark indicating selection. 2. Final Submittals: Five sets (except for samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics). One will be returned marked with action taken. F. Distribution: 1. Maintain returned sets of samples at the Project site for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. 2. Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers and others as involved in required performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1.08 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Where action and return is required or requested, Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 20 October 2010 01 3300 - 4 SUBMITTALS ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB ' 1. Compliance with specified characteristics and requirements is Contractor's responsibility. 2. Submittals not previously reviewed and stamped to indicate Contractor's approval will be returned 1 without Architect review, 3. Architect will review submittals for general conformance with design concept of the project and general compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. B. Action Stamp: Architect will stamp each submittal with self-explanatory action stamp. Stamp will be marked appropriately to indicate action taken. 1. APPROVED: Indicates that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 2. APPROVED AS CORRECTED: Indicates that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and with requirements of ' the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare new submittal in accordance with notations or appropriate requirements. Repeat as necessary to obtain acceptance action mark. 4. REJECTED: Do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including ' purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. C. The Architect's stamp, in addition to the information noted above, will indicate the following: 1. Review and approval are only for general conformance with the information given and the design concept of the Project as expressed in the Contract Documents. Review and approval of submittals are not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details, such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for the installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review and approval of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation contained in the Contract documents. The Architect's review and approval shall not constitute approval of any construction ' means, methods, techniques, sequences, or any safety precautions or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 1 D. Do not permit submittals marked Revise and Resubmit, or Rejected, to be used at project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. E. Where submittal is for information or record purposes, special processing or other activity, receipt will be ' acknowledged in appropriate manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Prior to commencement of construction, submit a Schedule of Submittals indicating anticipated submittal dates and dates that submittals must be approved so as not to impede the timely progression of the Work. ' END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 3300 - 5 SUBMITTALS tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. E. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections that specify those activities. 1. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. 2. Inspections, tests and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services as required by the Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. F. Owner shall contract for testing of soils, backfill placement, concrete, reinforcing structural steel, steel placement, welding, and other tests as required. G. Mock-ups. H. Tolerances. Testing and inspection services. J. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: Provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services as specified elsewhere and required by governing authorities. The exception is where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum. 1. Employ and pay an independent agency to perform specified quality control services not paid for by the Owner as described above. 2. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform inspections and tests specified as the Owner's responsibility. B. Re-testing: 1. Pay for the cost of re-testing where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. 2. Cost of re-testing construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in 20 October 2010 01 4000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: 1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. 3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. 4. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. 5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. E. Coordination: 1. Coordinate with each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 2. Schedule times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. B. Design Data: Submit for TGBa's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Providence Health System's information. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to TGBa, the owner's representative, and to Aldrich + Associates. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of tesUinspection. i. Conformance with Contract Documents. j. Test results and an interpretation of test results. k. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. 20 October 2010 01 4000 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB I. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested m. Work complies with Contract Document requirements. n. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. o. Recommendations on re-testing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are pre-qualified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. B. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with requirements for "Cutting and Patching" in Section 01 7329. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is a part of the Work, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 4000 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 4100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Comply with and give notices as required bylaws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing qn performance of the Work. 8. Regulatory requirements include modifications, amendments, additions, and the like, current as of the date of these documents. C. Referenced codes establish minimum requirement levels. Where provisions of various codes or standards conflict, more stringent provisions govern. Promptly submit to Architect written notice of observed variations from legal requirements in Contract Documents. D. Compliance requirements include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. International Building Code and related Standards, 2006 Edition, amended by the local Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2, Life Safety Code, NFPA 101-2003. 3. State Rules and Regulations for Barrier Free Design, WAC 51-50. 4. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1994. 5. Fire Doors/Windows, NFPA 80-1997. 6. Rules and Regulations for the Washington State Department of Health. 7. Department of Labor and Industries Regulations, including General Safety and Health Standards, WAC 296-24. 8. OSHA regulations and standards. 9. International Fire Code (IFC), 2006 Edition. 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes. 11. Factory Mutual (FM). 12. Washington Survey and Rating Board. 13. Mechanical Work: a. International Mechanical Code, 2006 Edition. b. Uniform Plumbing Code, latest Edition. 14. Electrical Work: a. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). c. NFPA, 2006 National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code, and above listings as applicable. d. State Electrical Construction Code. 15. Environmental Requirements: Work to be performed in compliance with relevant statutes and regulations dealing with prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of public natural resources. 16. Energy Requirements: Comply with insulation and energy conservation requirements of local State and City Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 17. Applicable State Department of Transportation Codes and Specifications. 18. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 19. Local City Ordinances and Codes 20. Hospital Licensing Regulations Chapter 246-320 WAC. E. Drawings and Specifications govem whenever Drawings and Specifications require higher standards than are required by governing codes, regulations, and ordinances. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED 20 October 2010 01 4100 - 1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB L i1 i 20 October 2010 01 4100 - 2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08082.02 SECTION 01 5000 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART i GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary of the Work 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities, worker accommodations, field offices, for execution of the Work. 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Contractor shall provide temporary power as required to execute the Work. B. Provide power outlets, branch wiring and other required items from point of connection to power supply. 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain temporary lighting for construction operations. B. Permanent lighting may be utilized during construction. Repair, clean and replace lamps at end of construction. C. Provide temporary, adequate lighting for interim parking, drives and pedestrian walkways. Maintain a ' minimum of aft. candles at all locations. 1.05 TEMPORARY WATER ' A. Arrange with the local jurisdiction to obtain water from existing hydrants at Contractor's costs. B. Provide water connection at source to be designated by Owner. ' C. Provide piping, hoses, fittings and other required items from point of connection to water supply. D. Provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled water type drinking water units, including paper cup supply. 1.06 TELEPHONE SERVICE A l hones i i S d d d . y p upp an w r ng as nee e . 1.07 TEMPORARY HEAT ' A. Provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures and high humidity. B, Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. C. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. 1.08 SANITARY FACILITIES ' A. Provide temporary toilets throughout the execution of the Work. 1.09 BARRIERS / SIGNAGE A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas. B. Provide barricades required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and roads where construction work is underway. 20 October 2010 ' 01 5000 - 1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS , tgba -Pr oject #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB C Provide t b i f ki d i ll i i lk ' . emporary arr ers an gnage or a m par s nter ng and wa ways. 1.1U PROTECTION AND SECURITY A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. r B. Provide security and facilities to protect Work and existing facilities from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. ' C. Fence hazardous materials for safety. 1.11 CONSTRUCTION CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish on a daily basis. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Parking lots affected by construction traffic will be swept as required to allow for public use. , C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site periodically and dispose of off-site. 1.12 CONSTRUCTION SITE CONTROL ' A. Limited space will be provided on site for a container for construction debris and minimal trailer storage only. The area is to be kept clean and secure. ' B. Trash & Debris Removal: Remove all trash and debris resulting from the Contractor's work from site daily; dispose of at Contractor's expense. Allow no debris, broken or open cartons or other refuse to collect in the project or around it. At completion of the Work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials. , C. Hazardous Material: Store volatile waste and materials in covered metal containers and remove wastes from site daily. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. D. Regulations: Conduct all cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws and regulations. Do not burn or bury rubbish or waste material on the site of the ' Work. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary sewers. Do not dispose of wastes in streams and waterways or on ground or bury in ground. 1.13 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS ' A. Provide temporary field offices as required to execute the Work. 1.14 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES , A. Remove temporary above grade and buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1.15 SPECIAL CONTROLS ' A. Noise Control: Comply with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, (AHJ) B. Air Compressors: Provide electric-driven equipment with silencing packages, unless otherwise approved. , C. Jack Hammers: No restrictions. D. Other Equipment; If noise levels for any piece of equipment cannot be brought to noise level criterion, , then that piece will not be allowed on the Work. E. Dust Control: During the period of construction, provide means of controlling dust and dirt to comply 20 October 2010 01 5000 - 2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB with jursidictions having authority. F. Fume Control: Do not place any fume producing equipment (gas or diesel driven types) adjacent to building air intake louvers or vents, and avoid polluting any air intakes or return air grilles located on the existing air handling system inside the building. Do not leave equipment idling unnecessarily. G. Temporary Signs: All signs to be approved by the Owner prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 5000 - 3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 1 SECTION 01 6000 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PRODUCT PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Products, materials and equipment shall be new unless specified or shown otherwise. B. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. C. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified and indicated on drawings, or as specifically approved in writing by Architect. D. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with "First Class Workmanship." 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable. 3. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical and by same manufacturer (whether furnished under one Section or more). 4. Provide products suitable for service conditions. 5. Adhere to indicated equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions, unless variations are specifically approved in writing. E. Do not use materials and equipment for other than designed or specified purposes and uses or that has been removed from existing premises except as specifically identified or allowed by the Contract Documents. F. Long-Lead-Time Items: 1. Provide copies of purchase orders to Architect with reasonable promptness after receipt of Notice to Proceed for such items. 2. Forward copies of acknowledgment, production, and shipping schedules to Architect as received for required items. 3. Order items far enough in advance to assure timely delivery. No schedule adjustments will be granted for failure to do so. G. Products: 1. Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and systems comprising the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components specifically identified for reuse. 2. Where specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards by any manufacturer. 3. Where specified by naming several products or manufacturers, and "or approved", other products and manufacturers will be considered under substitution procedures. 4. Use interchangeable components of the same Manufacturer for similar components. 5. Where specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS t A. When Contract Documents require installation of work to comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute instructions to concerned entities. ' B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, directions and specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect and Owner for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. ' 20 October 2010 01 6000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory steps or installation procedures unless it is both: 1. Verified with and accepted by Owner. 2. Specifically modified or exempted by Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Product specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of Manufacturers named and meeting specifications; submit a request for substitution for any Manufacturer not named. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. General: If a bidder or the Contractor desires approval of some material or product other than that specified, they may submit a written request for approval of the alternate or substitute item in accordance with the following requirements. All approvals are at the discretion of the Owner, Architect and his Consultants. No request for approval will be considered unless submitted in accordance with this Article. B. Requests for Approval: Every request for approval of alternative or substitute materials or products shall be accompanied by its reference in the Contract Documents and complete catalog, technical and other information and, if applicable, samples showing comparison of physical and other pertinent characteristics as required to establish equivalence or acceptability for the proposed application. Where specific test results are required by the Contract Documents, the comparison data for the proposed item shall be based upon the same test methods as those specified, or they shall be correlated to clearly demonstrate comparability. C. During Bid Period: Submit written requests on the Substitution Request Form following this Section for approval of alternative materials or products. The Architect must receive all requests not later than ten (10) days prior to scheduled time for receipt of bids in order to receive consideration. All plan holders will be informed by addendum of additional materials and products approved for use. No other form of approval will be given during the bid period and bidders shall not rely upon any approval not incorporated into the documents in this manner. D. After Receipt of Bid or Proposal: Requests for approval of substitute materials or products will not be considered except under one or more of the following conditions. With their request, the Contractor shall indicate which condition it believes applies: 1. Unavailability: Asubstitution is required because the specified item is not available due to factors beyond the control of the Contractor. 2. Unsuitability: Subsequent information or changes disclose inability of the specified item to perform as intended. 3. Regulatory requirements: Final interpretation of Code, regulatory requirements, safety requirements or insurance requirements necessitate a change due to inability of the specified item to conform. 4. Warranty: Manufacturer or fabricator cannot certify or warrant performance of specified item as required. 5. Owner's benefit: In the judgment of the Architect, acceptance of the proposed substitution is clearly in the Owner's best interest because of cost, quality or other consideration. In requesting a substitution under this clause, the Contractor shall furnish substantiation of any such reason. E. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. F. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with 20 October 2010 ' 01 6000 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS i nic tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Cl Yelm MOB ' Contract Documents. G. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to ' be complete with no additional cost to Providence Health System. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Agrees that it will coordinate all trades including changes thereto as may be required, that it waives ' all claims for additional costs which subsequently become apparent as a consequence of the substitution and that it will bear all costs related thereto, including costs of Architect's services for redesign if deemed necessary. ' H. Redesign and Coordination: In making request for approval of alternative or substitute materials, the Bidder/Contractor agrees that it will coordinate all trades including changes thereto as maybe required, that it waives all claims for additional costs which subsequently become apparent as a consequence of ' the substitution and that it will bear all costs related thereto, including costs of Architect's services for redesign if deemed necessary. I. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data ' submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. ' J. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit five copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product ' equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The TGBa will notify Aldrich + Associates in writing of decision to acceptor reject request. If TGBA does not reply within 14 days of receipt, the substitution request is considered not approved. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. D. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with Progress Schedule. Coordinate to avoid conflict with work and site conditions. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, and with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Inspect shipments immediately on delivery. ' a. Assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals. b_ Assure that products are properly protected and undamaged. E. Provide required equipment and personnel needed to handle products. Utilize methods preventing soiling or damage. F. Provide offsite storage and drotection when site does not permit onsite storage and protection. ' G. Cooperate with Owner and Owners Representative to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. 1. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored on site. ' 2. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations. 20 October 2010 ' 01 6000 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB 3. Delivery and storage of materials shall be confined to designated areas and subject to fire and safety requirements. 4. Delivery of materials and loading of debris shall not interfere with the Owner's operations. Owner will not accept deliveries for Contractor. 5. Care shall be taken during delivery or removal of material to avoid damage to existing facilities. Should such damage occur due to Contractor's operations, repairs shall be made immediately to restore facilities to their original condition with out cost to the Owner. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. E. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. F. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels left intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 3. Do not allow storage of combustible materials in mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. 4. Note requirements on Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS's). G. Coordinate exterior onsite storage with Owner. 1. Store fabricated products above ground. 2. Position on blocking or skids; prevent soiling or staining. 3. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings. 4. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. H. Arrange storage to provide easy access for periodic inspection. 1. Maintain products under specified conditions; 2. Keep products free from damage or deterioration. Protect products after installation: 1. Protect building from damage (from all causes) until Owner's acceptance. 2. Provide substantial coverings such as boarding, building paper and polyethylene sheeting as necessary to protect installed products. Protect against: a. Traffic damage; b. Subsequent construction operations. 3. Remove coverings when no longer needed. 4. Repair or replace damages to Owner's satisfaction and as required for acceptance. 20 October 2010 01 6000 - 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 1 f 1 1 e 1 i~ r~ s 1 1 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO: tgba 21911 76th Avenue West, Suite 210 Edmonds, WA 98026 Fax: (425) 774-7503 Email: GDais@tgbarchitects.com PROJECT NAME: Providence Timeshare Clinic CONTRACTOR: Aldrich + Associates We hereby submit for consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: Section Paragraph Specified Item Attach complete dimensional information and technical data conforming to requirements of Section 01 3300, including laboratory tests, if applicable. Include complete information on changes to Drawings and Specifications, which proposed substitution would require for its proper installation. Submit with request all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality, performance, and appearance to that specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. Indicate differences in quality of materials and construction. Fill in Blanks Below: Proposed Substitution: A. State the reason for the substitution and why it is being B. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? If yes, clearly indicate yes no C. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? D. What affect does substitution have on other trades, other Contracts, and Contract completion date? E. What affect does substitution have on applicable code requirements? F. Difference between proposed substitution and specified item? 20 October 2010 01 6000 - 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB G. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different (explain) H. List of names and addresses of three similar projects on which product was used, date of installation , and Architect's name and address: 1. 2. 3. I. Cost Impact: Undersigned attests function and quality equivalent or superior to specified items. CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUAL PERFORMANCE Submitted By: ' By: signature title Date: Remarks: firm address telephone date Signature must be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. For use by Architect: Accepted Accepted as Noted Not Accepted Received Too Late Signature Date END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 6000 - 6 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 7000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General procedures. B. Final acceptance. C. Record document submittals. D. Adjusting. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 7413 -Construction Cleaning B. Section 01 7423 -Final Cleaning C. Section 01 7823 -Operation and Maintenance Data 1.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES A. Provide to Owner submittals required by governing authorities. Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Submit required warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. C. Submit record drawings, record specifications, maintenance manuals, final project photographs and similar record information required by Owner. D. Complete start-up testing of systems and instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Remove temporary facilities from premises, along with construction tools, mock-ups and similar elements not indicated to remain as part of the Work. F. Complete final cleaning. Touch up, repair and restore marred exposed finishes. G. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for the Architect's/Owner's inspection. H. After completing each of the above listed obligations, request inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. I. Inspection Procedures: Prepare a punchlist of all items remaining to be completed prior to request for inspection; submit this list to the Architect. On receipt of request for inspection and the Contractor's punchlist, the Architect will proceed or advise Contractor of unfilled requirements. Architect will prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or will advise Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected (punch list) before certificate will be issued. 1. Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that Work has been substantially completed. Should the Architect be requested to return for more than (2) back-punch reviews, the cost of additional Design Team time shall be borne by the Contractor. The Architect's time records and invoice shall be submitted to the Owner. The Contractor will execute two deductive change orders for this amount to the Owner. 2. Results of completed inspection will form basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final 20 October 2010 01 7000 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB payment, complete the following, listing exceptions in the request: 1. Submit certified copy of Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 2. Submit final Application for Payment, accompanied by releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Identify total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments and amount remaining due. 3. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 4. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 5. Refer to Supplementary Conditions for additional requirements. 6. Submit Record Documents (see below). 7. Submit O & M Manuals. 1.05 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. 1. Protect from loss in secure location. 2. Provide access to record documents for Architect's reference. B. Record Drawings: Maintain clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of contract drawings and shop drawings. Mark-up these drawings to show actual installation. 1. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions accurately. 2. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at later date. 3. At completion of Project, Contractor shall obtain CAD drawing files from the Architect, make As-Built Revisions with appropriate clouds for identification, and return them to the Architect. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of Project Manual, including Addenda, clean and undamaged. Enter marks and notations to indicate conditions of actual installation. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and specifications. E. Record Extra Materials: Submit complete set of delivery transmittals signed by the Owner's Representative acknowledging receipt of the correct types, colors and quantities of extra materials as required in the individual specification sections. F. Record Samples: 1. Immediately prior to date of Substantial Completion, meet at the site with Architect and Owner's personnel to determine which of the submitted samples that have been maintained during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to Owner for record purposes. 2. Comply with delivery to Owner's sample storage area. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals are specified in Section 01 7823. H. Submit Record Documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 20 October 2010 01 7000 - 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 3.01 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment for smooth and unhindered operation. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 7000 - 3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1 t 1 1 s r tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 7123 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY FIELD Providence Timeshare Clinic Yeim MO8 A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Lines and grades 2. Project layout 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record all survey data as required under provisions of Sections 01 3300 and 01 7000. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surveyor: Engage a Registered Land Surveyor registered in the State in which the Work is to be done to perform all required land surveying services. B. Contractor shall employ a Registered Structural Engineer experienced in construction techniques and sequences and temporary structural support systems, who is licensed in the State of Washington. The Project Structural Engineer shall advise the Contractor as to the safety and adequacy of all intermediate structural provisions necessary for erection of the completed structure. 1. The Structural Engineer shall assume the responsibilities and duties as it relates to means and methods (i.e. erection sequence, temporary bracing, etc.) 2. Temporary bracing shall be coordinated with other trades to permit continuous operation of construction. 3. Should it be necessary to modify the structural design to accommodate construction means and methods, the Structural Engineer shall advise the Contractor who shall immediately notify the Architect and await his direction. 4. Proposed changes or modifications to the structural design shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer of Record for approval prior to incorporating design changes or modifications into the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Owner will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes. B. Survey provided by Owner. C. Verify layout information shown on drawings, in relation to property survey and existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout Work. 1. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. 2. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. a. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. b. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacement on the original survey control points. D. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 20 October 2010 01 7123 - 1 FIELD ENGINEERING tgba -Project #08062.02 1. Record benchmark locations on project record documents. 2. Record horizontal and vertical data. Existing Utilities and Equipment: Existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. 1. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. 2. Prior to construction, verify location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer storm sewer, and water service piping. 3. Prior to construction, review Owner's as built and post construction documents. 3.t)2 PERFORMANCE A. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the project. 1. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. 2. Do not scale drawings to determine dimensions. 3. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 4. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work; make this log available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On project record drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. 2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site-work. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means. D. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in, or affected by the Wvrk. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 01 7123 - 2 FIELD ENGINEERING tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 7329 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB CUTTING AND PATCHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cutting, fitting, and patching necessary to complete the Work, excluding cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical work as specified in Divisions 22 through 26. 8. Make the several parts of the Work fit together properly. C. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. D. Remove and replace defective work. E. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. F. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing, and patch construction accordingly. G. Provide openings in structural and nonstructural elements for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Divisions 22 through 26 -Describes cutting, fitting and patching required for mechanical and electrical WOrk. 1.03 SUBMITTALS I, ~ A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering structural or building enclosure elements. 8. Determine locations of existing reinforcement and mark locations on concrete surface in field. Show required penetrations in relation to existing reinforcement. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ skilled and experienced workers to perform cutting and patching. B. Perform cutting of concrete structure in manner to avoid impairing structural integrity. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to minimize time between cutting and the installation of new construction. B. Schedule work with Owner to minimize interference with existing operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with applicable Specifications and Standards for each product. B. Product Substitutions: Submit request for substitution of specified materials under provisions of Section 01 6000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions of project. Inspect elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting product installations and work performance. 20 October 2010 01 7329 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB C. Notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory work and questionable conditions. Do not proceed with work until Architect issues further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary support adequate to ensure structural in#egrity of affected work and safety of Contractor personnel. B. Provide devices and methods protecting other portions of project from damage. C. Provide protection from elements for work exposed by cutting. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Use methods likely to cause least damage to work to remain. B. Do not cut through reinforcing bars unless specifically indicated on structural drawings. if reinforcement is encountered, notify Architect immediately and obtain instructions for proceeding. C. Perform coring of concrete structure in manner to minimize damage to adjacent areas of concrete. D. Fit work tight to adjacent elements. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction. Completely seal voids. E. Restore work cut or removed to original strength and properties. F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. 1. Plane surfaces: Refiinish to nearest intersection in each direction. 2. Assemblies: Refinish entire unit or assembly. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 7329 - 2 CUTT{NG AND PATCHING tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 7413 PROGRESS CLEANING Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish during construction. B. Ongoing daily cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 7423 -Final Cleaning. B. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific cleaning for Product or work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Provide covered containers for deposit of waste materials, debris and rubbish. B. Owner's equipment is not available for Contractor's use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING A. Maintain areas under Contractor's control free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces and other closed or remote spaces prior to closing the space. C. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particulate will not adhere to wet or newly-coated surfaces. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and dispose of off-site. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 7413 - 1 PROGRESS CLEANING tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 7423 FINAL CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Final cleaning of project. 1.02 RELATED A. Section 01 7413 -Progress Cleaning B. Section 01 7000 -Closeout Procedures C. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific cleaning for product or work. 1.03 DESCRIPTION Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Execute cleaning prior to inspection for Final Completion of each designated portion of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned. C. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on all cleaning products and materials prior fo start of construction for review by Owner or Owner's Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING A. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean interior and exterior exposed-to-view surfaces. B. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to retain. C. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films and other foreign substances. D. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition; remove foreign substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine. E. Vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces. F. Clean resilient and hard-surfaces flooring as specified. G. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication. H. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. I. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters when units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers and coils when units have been operated without filters during construction. J. Clean light fixtures and lamps. K. Maintain cleaning until Final Completion. L. Owner will provide final cleaning of interiors after Final Completion. Provide access and coordinate with Owner's personnel. 20 October 2010 01 7423 - 1 FINAL CLEANING tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 7423 - 2 FINAL CLEANING tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 4.07 SUMMARY Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Compile product data and related information Manuals appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operations. Manuals must contain information on all furnished and installed items, organized by Specification Section. Include Manufacturer or supplier name, address and telephone number, and all colors, finishes, model numbers, etc. necessary to order matching products and materials. Verbal information or piecemeal product information distributed at training sessions with Owner's personnel are not a substitution for providing complete, comprehensive Manuals. Modify data as required to accurately represent completed installations. 8. Prior to Owner's acceptance of any portion or stage of the Work, instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance, equipment and systems operations. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.03 Submittal Requirements B. 1.04 Format for Operation and Maintenance Manuals C. 1.05 Contents for each Volume of Manuals D. 1.06 Manual for Products, Materials and Finishes E. 1.07 Manuals for Equipment and Systems 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Preliminary Submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: B. Submit three copies of preliminary drafts for each discipline (Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical) to Owner, Owner Representative and Architect, two weeks in advance of Substantial Completion of the Work. Include temporary cover, proposed formats and outlines of contents. Architect and Consultants will review drafts and return one compiled copy with all comments. C. Revise Preliminary Submittal as necessary in response to comments, and resubmit three copies for approval by Architect, Owner and Owner Representative to Final Submittal of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Final Submittal of Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of Manuals to Architect, following approval of Preliminary Submittal and prior to time of Final Inspection or Acceptance. Architect will distribute sets to Owner and Consultants. 1.04 FORMAT FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals should be organized into separate binders as follows: B. Divisions 2 through 14 Architectural C. Division 22 and 23 Plumbing and HVAC D. Division 26 Electrical Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation. Prepare data in instructional manual form for use by Owner's personnel. Modify data as required to accurately represent completed installations. F. Binders: Commercial quality, 3 hole punched, vinyl covered hardboard binder, secured with aluminum 20 October 2010 01 7823 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB screw osts sized for 8-1/2 b 11 inch sheet format Do not exceed 3-112 inch binder width p y , . . G. Cover: Identify the cover of each Manual with the printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", Project Name, identification of Discipline and Division(s) contained in the Manual, ' and completion date of the Project. Include names of Owner, Architect and General Contractor. N. Identify the spine of each Manual with the printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", Project Title, and identification of Discipline contained in the Manual. I. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten information on 20 pound white or off-white paper. K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. L. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related groupings. 1.05 CONTENTS FOR EACH VOLUME OF MANUALS A. Project Directory: Indicate Project Name and Project Number. List: Owner, Owner Representative, Architect, Consultants, Contractor, major subcontractors and major equipment suppliers with addresses, telephone numbers, and name of responsible parties. B. Table of Contents: List contents of each Manual, indexed to Project Manual Table of Contents Section numbers and titles. C. Product Directory: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. Include local source of supplies and replacement parts. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. D. Product Data: Submit original product literature for every product, material and finish used in the Project. Photo-copies are not acceptable. Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products, model numbers, component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information by marking out, striking out, or by notation. For custom fabricated products, where product data is unavailable, reference by Shop Drawing submittal number and description. Include Materials Safety Data Sheets , (MSDS) for each hazardous chemical where applicable. E. Drawings and Diagrams: Include as necessary to supplement Product Data. Illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems. Show wiring, control, and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. F. Written Text: Include as necessary to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating Manufacturer's instructions. G. Warranties, Service Gantracts and Maintenance Contracts Issued: Refer to Section 01 7836. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel indicating proper procedures in event of failure. Include instances which may affect validity of warranties. 1.06 MANUAL FOR PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Furnish Product Data and Maintenance Data for all building products, materials, and finishes provided under Work of this Contract. Include data for all submittals and shop drawings required for all sections of Divisions 2 through 14. B. Product Data: Identify catalog number, size, composition, colors, and finishes. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. 20 October 2010 01 7823 - 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB C. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's instructions for appropriate cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and treatment, and recommended ' maintenance schedule. D. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance and repair. E. Design Data: Include mix designs, physical characteristics and limitations, specifications and tolerances. F. Color: Identify by Manufacturer, color name and number, or formula, as necessary to re-establish original. G. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specification Sections. H. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of j data. 1.07 MANUALS FOR EpUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Furnish Operating and Maintenance Data for equipment and systems provided under Work of this Contract. Include separate Manuals for following: 1. Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manual_ 2. Electrical Operation and Maintenance Manual. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4. Others, where applicable to system or binder width. B. Provide information in accordance with the requirements provided in the individual specification sections ' listed in Divisions 22, 23 and 26. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to Final Inspection or Acceptance, arrange for each installer of operating equipment to meet with and instruct Owner's designated personnel in proper operation and maintenance. B. If installer's instructors are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by Manufacturer's representatives. C. Time and place of instruction period shall be as mutually agreeable. D. Include detailed review of operation and maintenance manuals during instruction. Any operation and maintenance manuals provided during instruction will be considered separate and extra from those required under paragraph 1.03 Submittal Requirements- 3.02 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION A. Include preventative maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment or system furnished requiring periodic inspections, lubrication, adjustment, to ensure optimum and continued performance of equipment. B. Include detailed review of the following 1. Maintenance manuals 2. Record documents 3. Spare parts and materials 4. Tools 5. Lubricants 6. Fuels 7. Identification systems 20 October 2010 01 7823 - 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB 8. Control sequences 9. Hazards 10. Cleaning 11. Warranties and bonds 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments 3.03 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate following procedures: 1. Start-up and shutdown 2. Emergency operations 3. Noise and vibration adjustments 4. Safety procedures 5. Economy and efficiency adjustments 6. Effective energy adjustments END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 7823 - 4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Cli i i meshare n c tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence T Yelm MOB SECTION 01 7836 PART1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by Contract Documents, including manufacturers' standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to General Conditions for terms of Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. Specific requirements for warranties for work, products and installations that are specified to be I warranted are included in individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 14, and 22, 23, and 26. 3. General close-out requirements are included in Section 01 7000 Closeout Procedures. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of warranty on work that incorporates products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor. C. Owner's recourse for Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents is not limited byproduct warranty periods. 1.02 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by warranty has failed, replace or rebuild work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from use of work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. ' D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, ' rights, or remedies. 1. Owner reserves right to reject warranties and to limit product selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Owner reserves right to refuse to accept work for project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such work or part of work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to Architect prior to date certified for Substantial Completion. If Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than date of Substantial Completion for Work, or a designated portion of Work, submit written warranties upon request of Architect. B. Forms for special warranties are included at end of this Section. Prepare a written document utilizing ' 20 October 2010 01 7836 - 1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or the Contractor and subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 14, and 22, 23 and 26 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. C. When special warranty is required to be executed by Contractor, or Contractor and subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by required parties. Submit draft to Owner through Architect for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 14, and 22, 23, and 26 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion, compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on Table of Contents of Project Manual. E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable cloth binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11 inch paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tabs to identify product or installation. Provide typed description of product or installation, including name of product, name, address, and telephone number of installer. 2. Identify each binder on front and spine with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," project title or name, and name of Contractor. F. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTfON -NOT USED END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 01 7836 - 2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB SECTION 01 9000 MATERIAL COLOR AND PATTERN STANDARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. It is the intent of this schedule to list required color, textures and finishes selected for materials specified in the Work. It is not the intent to list every material; only those that will influence bid prices and approval of materials. B. This schedule includes material/color types that are shown in the documents and/or are located in a general manner by description in this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Refer to product sections for specific material requirements. For material colors not scheduled in this section and where not selected in the product literature, the Architect will select from manufacturer's standard colors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND APPROVALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300. B. Manufacturer's trade names and color numbers, which are listed for reference only, are not intended to imply that products of that manufacturer are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of matching color and finishes of other manufacturers. Samples are required for all items and the Architect will be the sole judge in determining the degree of acceptable differences for the listed color and/or finishes. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SECTION 06 4100 -ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK A. Plastic Laminate 1. PL-7 a. MFG -Formica b. Pattern - MDF Solidz c. Color - 7812-58 d. Location -See Interior Elevations 2. PL-10 a. MFG -Formica b. Pattem - Tatami Mat c. Color - 3508-58 d. Location -See Interior Elevations B. Hardwood 1. HDWD-1 a. Species - P.S. Cherry b. Finish - RA07 Ravine, VT Industries c. Location -Doors and as noted on finish plan ' 2.02 SECTION 06 6400 -SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS A. SPF-1 1. MFG - Lumicor 2. Product - 1/2" Lumiclear 3. Style -Birch 4. Finish -clear 20 October 2010 01 9000 - 1 MATERIAL COLOR AND PATTERN STANDARDS t ba -P t #08062 2 g rojec .0 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 5. Location -see door schedule and interior elevation 2.03 SECTION 06 6116 -SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL A. SSM-4 1. MFG - Wilsonart 2. Pattern - Gibralter 3. Color -Crystal Champagne - 9145CY 4. Location -Counters with sinks 2.04 SECTION 09 5100 -ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A. ACT-2 1. MFG -Armstrong 2. Material -Mineral Fiber 3. Size-2'x2'x1" 4. Grid Face - 9/16" 5. Edges -Square Tegular 6. Pattem - 3251 Optima Open Plan 7. Sound Absorption - 0.95 8. Sound Attenuation - 190/NA 9. Color -White 2.05 SECTION 09 6500 -RESILIENT FLOORING A. Sheet Flooring 1. SV-2 a. MFG - Mannington b. Pattern -Magna Micaflec c. Color - 18011 Khaki d. Location -Toilet B. Tiling Flooring 1. MCT-1 a. MFG -Forbo b. Pattern -Real c. Color - 707 Barley d. Size - 13" X 13" e. Location -See Finish Plans 2. MCT -2 a. MFG -Forbo b. Pattern -Real c. Color - 767 Rust d. Size - 13" X 13" e. Location -See Finish Plans 3. MCT-5 a. MFG -Forbo b. Pattern -Real c. Color - 614 Charcoal d. Size - 13" X 13" e. Location -See Finish Plans C. Resilient Base 1. RB-1 a. MFG -Armstrong b. Style- Rubber Cove c. Color - 06 Olivine 20 October 2010 , 01 9000 - 2 MATERIAL COLOR AND PATTERN STANDARDS tgba -Project #08062.02 d. Location -Throughout, UNO 2.06 SECTION 09 6800 -CARPETING A. CPT-2 1. MFG - Patcraft 2. Pattern - 26470 Luxurious EBL 3. Type -Broadloom 4. Color - 00765 Timeless 5. Location -waiting and offices 2.07 SECTION 09 900 -PAINTING AND COATING A. P-10 1. MFG -Sherwin Williams 2. Finish -Latex, eggshell, enamel 3. Color -SW6365 Cachet Cream 4. Location -Main Throughout, UNO B. P-11 1. MFG -Sherwin Williams 2. Finish -Latex, eggshell, enamel 3. Color - SW0012 Empire Gold 4. Location -Accent UNO, See Finish Plan For Reference C. P-12 1. MFG -Sherwin Williams 2. Finish -Latex, eggshell, enamel 3. Color - SW7710 Brandywine 4. Location -Accent UNO, See Finish Plan For Reference D. P-13 1. MFG -Sherwin Williams 2. Finish -Latex, eggshell, enamel 3. Color - SW6214 Underseas 4. Location -Accent UNO, See Finish Plan For Reference E. P-15 1. MFG -Parker Paint Colorlife 2. Finish -Latex, Semi-Gloss, enamel 3. Color - CL 2886N Sea-blite 4. Location -Door Frames F. EP-10 1. MFG - Shervrin Williams 2. Finish -Epoxy, Eggshell, Enamel 3. Color -SW6365 Cachet Cream 4. Location -Toilet ceilings G. EP-13 1. MFG -Sherwin Williams 2. Finish -Epoxy, Eggshell, Enamel 3. Color - SW6214 Underseas 4. Location -Toilet walls 2.08 SECTION 10 2601 -WALL AND CORNER GUARDS A. CG-1 1. MFG - Koroguard Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 01 9000 - 3 MATERIAL COLOR AND PATTERN STANDARDS tgba -Project #08062.02 2. Finish -Brushed Stainless Steel 3. Size - 48" AFF, 2" Leg 4. Location -All exposed corners, see Finish Plan For Reference END OF SECTION Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB G 1 1 G 1 t t 20 October 2010 , 01 9000 - 4 MATERIAL COLOR AND PATTERN STANDARDS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB t u f 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION 02 4100 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolition requires selective removal and subsequent off-site disposal: 1. Removal of utilities not to remain. 2. Removal of concrete paved walks, asphalt paving and concrete curbs. 3. Removal and relocation of landscaping, soil, and equipment as required to accommodate new construction. 4. Removal of mechanical equipment, piping, and electrical items. Refer to Divisions 22, 23 and 26 for additional information. B. Ownership of Materials: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, materials required to be removed are the property of the Contractor. 1. Obtain from Owner list of items wanted to be retained for reuse or far their salvage value. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300. B. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Architect for review prior to commencement of work. C. Include coordination for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. B. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent paved areas by demolition work at no cost to Owner. C. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to insure minimum interference with roadways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. D. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service, and protect them against ' damage during demolition operations. E. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. 1. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 2. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. ' 3. Engage street cleaning services, or propose and gain Owner approval of alternate means to keep all surrounding streets, public or otherwise clean at all times. ' PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCTS -NOT USED EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Inspection: Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Report to the Architect any deviations found between existing conditions and requirements stated in the Contract Documents. 20 October 2010 ' 02 4100 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Cover and protect equipment and fixtures from soilage and damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. C. Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services not indicated to remain. 1. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building and parking lots. 2. Provide minimum of two business days advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during change-over. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. B. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved structural fill as defined in Section 31 1000 Site Clearing compact structural fill in accordance with Section 31 2323 including maximum lift thickness and minimum compaction percentage. D. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of conflict. 1. Submit detailed written report to Architect. 2. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. C. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 3.04 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. 1. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start of operations. 2. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 02 4100 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 03 5415 CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Section Includes: Underiayment fill work where existing concrete floors are not acceptable to finish flooring installers, and elsewhere at new concrete floor areas as required to achieve specified finish level tolerances. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide new concrete floors within the finish floor tolerances specified. B. Where specified tolerances are not achieved, or where defects unacceptable to the finish Flooring installer (e.g., low spots, cracks, roughness, etc.) are present, Contractor is responsible to remedy such work. C. Provide underlayment at all areas designated to receive resilient flooring. 1,03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 3300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for material required, including installation instructions. 1. State in submittal the area within the building said material is to be used, existing conditions which requires such repair material, and written approval from the finish flooring installer stating that said material is compatible with the flooring adhesives to be used. 2. Obtain approval of each submittal by the Architect for the intended area of usage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials of a type that is appropriate for the condition and which is totally compatible with the subsequent finish flooring material. 1. Type of material must be approved for use beneath the finish flooring material (i.e., carpet, resilient floor tile, sheet vinyl, etc.). 2. Material shall have physical properties that are suitable for the intended floor usage. 3. Material shall be of a type which will not shrink, crack, or spall. 4. Provide primer and other materials and accessories recommended by underlayment manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Large Areas: Ardex "K-15" cement-based, self-leveling floor underlayment; or equivalent underlayment material. 2. Small Areas: Master Builders "Set Latex Cement" and "Acryl-Set; or equivalent latex cement mixture. 3. Other Approved Manufacturers: Raeco, and Euclid Chemical. C. Aggregate: As recommended by underlayment manufacturer for thickness of underlayment required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare existing concrete substrate, and new concrete substrate, clean and prime as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 20 October 2010 03 5415 - 1 CEMENTITiOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Feather edges to match other concrete floor elevations. C. Trowel material smooth, flat and without surface defects that might telegraph through subsequent floor finish material. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 03 5415 - 2 CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT i Cli i dence Timeshare n c tgba -Project #08062.02 Prov Yelm MOB SECTION 06 1000 ' PART 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY GENERAL 1.01 SE CTION INCLUDES i A. Roofing cant strips. B. Preservative treated wood materials. C. Fire retardant treated wood materials. D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. E. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. F. Concealed wood blocking, Hailers, and supports. ' G. Miscellaneous wood Hailers, furring, and grounds. H. Wood preservative treatment 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. APA PRP-108 -Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels (Form E445); 2001. B. AWPA C9 -Plywood -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003. C. AWPA U1 -Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2009. D. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. E. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Statement certifying that wood members used in the Work have received the appropriate wood treatment. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Provide lumber and other materials grade-marked or othervvise certified for quality by agency or association having species jurisdiction. Furnish only "dry' lumber. Material to receive 1 fire-retardant treatment with moisture content of not more than 12% and other lumber of not more than 19%. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 20 October 2010 06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB B. Lumber for Miscellaneous Uses: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Standard grade lumber for support of other work, including cant strips, bucks, Hailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subflooring: APA PRP-108: Rated Sheathing. 1. Exposure Class: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 32116 inches. B. Roof Sheathing: APA PRP-108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as follows: 1. Span Rating: 24/0. C. Wall Sheathing: APA PRP-108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as follows: 1. Span Rating: 2410. D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Size, type, material and finish suited to application and complying with applicable standards, including FS-N-105 and FF-W-92 and ANSI 618.6.1. B. 5ubfloor Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 -Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Re-dry treated lumber. C. Preservative Treatment: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and cut to fit. B. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates and supporting members using fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or receive finish materials. C. Install fasteners without splitting wood. D. Fasten panel products to allow for expansion at joints unless otherwise indicated. 20 October 2010 06 1000 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 3.02 CLEANING A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 06 1000 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Section 06 1000 -Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 4100 -Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A135.4 -American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. C. HPVA HP-1 -American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be per Section 01 3300. B. Product Data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and color. 1. Each type of siding specified. C. Samples for verification purposes of the following: 1. Lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 square inches for lumber and 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches for panels for each finish system and color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of finish carpentry by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with finish carpentry Manufacturer's and installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for finish carpentry during its storage and installation. 20 October 2010 06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with finish carpentry only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit exterior finish carpentry to be installed in compliance with Manufacturer's recommendations and when substrate is completely dry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AW1//AWMAC/VIf1 Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. B. Lumber Standards: Comply with Standard Grading and Dressing Rules, WCLIB; WWPA; applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. C. Plywood Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood, and for products not manufactured under PS 1, with APA PRP-108. D. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. WCLl6 -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA -Western Wood Products Association. 3. AW I -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards E. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. F. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary standard referenced below: 1. Particleboard: NPA 8. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: NPA 9. 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE. G. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork Cluality Standards Illustrated for Premium grade. 2.02 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS A. Trim and Rails: MDF molded millwork 1. Size and style: As shown or selected from Manufacturer's standard patterns. B. Closet Shelving: 1. Material: Vinyl coated, steel rod, ventilated shelving. 2. Hanging Rod: Integral with shelving. 2.03 COATED WIRE SHELVING/HANGING ROD A. General: Grade C-1008 cold drawn steel wire; coated with non-extruding PVC white color, 9-11 mils thickness. Cross deck spacing to be in 1"increments. Provide hanging rod where indicated on the drawings. Rod finish to match shelving. Provide all brackets, clips and anchors for installation of a complete unit. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering shelving which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Closet Maid 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 20 October 2010 06 2000 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB ' A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Stainless steel, non corrosive aluminum or hot-dip galvanized nails, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate unless recommended otherwise by Manufacturer. ' 1. Countersink nails and fill surface where face nailing is unavoidable. B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where ' possible. 1. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. ' 2. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchors with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153. C. Adhesives: Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives. D. Flashing: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. 1 E. Sealants: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section 07 9005 "Joint Sealers" for materials required for sealing siding work. Z.OS FABRICATION t A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and Manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. Provide finish carpentry with moisture content that is compatible with Project requirements. B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EX AMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions ' affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended by Manufacturer. C. Back prime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements for surface preparation and application in Section 09 9000 "Painting and Coating." 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. B. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated or finished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes or patterns. C. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated or ~ finished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 20 October 2010 06 2000 - 3 FINISH CARPENTRY tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB D. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes or patterns. E. Install finish carpentry so it is plumb, level, true and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required to align. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Splices cut at 45-degree angle. 3. All running trim one piece up to 10'-0". 4. Use finish nails except where screws shown. 5. Set nails for puttying. Countersink all fastenings. Putty recesses. 6. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 7. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems that may be in or adjacent to standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails. F. Finish in accordance with specified requirements. G. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry. 3.04 CLOSET SHELVING A. Securely mount with shelf Manufacturer supplied mounting hardware to studs behind drywall. Maximum span 36" between support brackets. 3.05 HANDRAIL A. Mount with metal brackets. Return ends of rail to wall. Bracket color to match rail finish. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.08 TOLERANCES AND PROTECTION A. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 06 2000 - 4 FINISH CARPENTRY tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 t SECTION 06 4100 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Plastic Laminate Panels C. Countertops. D. Cabinet hardware. E. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1000 -Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) -Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. C. BHMA A156.9 -American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Coordinate submittals for this Section with submittals for each of the specified Related Sections. Make single submittal for each type of submittal. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. D. Samples for Verification Purposes: 1. Plastic Laminate: Submit two samples, of each type, color, pattern and surface finish. 2. Transparent Finish Wood: Submit two finished samples of each wood species and cut indicated. 3. Opaque Finish Wood: Each material indicated. 4. Exposed Cabinet Hardware: Prior to ordering of finish hardware items for casework, submit one unit of each type and finish, tagged with full description for coordination with work. a. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal and review procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work. 5. Composite Sections: Full scale fabricated sections, not smaller than 6 inches wide by 12 inches long, showing run and corner. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Premium quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. B. Cabinet Hardware: Comply with handicapped requirements of ANSI 4.25 and 4.27. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 20 October 2010 06 4100 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK tgba -Project #08062.02 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Any local custom casework manufacturer that can provide casework in accordance with the Quality Assurance Paragraph and the quality standards listed in this Section. 2.02 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AW I//AWMAC/W I Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Casework Materials: AWI, premium grade. B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. C. Lumber: Applicable AW I quality standards for use and finishing characteristics. D. Fasteners and Anchorage Devices: Concealed types as appropriate for use. 2.04 ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK -WOOD VENEER FACED A. Quality Standard: AWI Sections 400 and related sections as referenced therein. B. Construction: 1. Type: Flush Overlay. 2. Grade: Premium 3. Doors: Flush type, solid particleboard core. 4. Species: See Section 01 9000. 5. Slip match veneer. 2.05 ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK -PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED A. Quality Standard: AW I Sections 400 and related sections as referenced therein. B. Construction: 1. Type: Flush overlay. 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Doors: Flush type, solid particleboard core. C. Plastic Laminate: 1. Exposed Surfaces: GP-28 (0.028-inch nominal thickness). 2. Semi-exposed Surfaces: a. Melamine, (0.020 inch nominal thickness) except GP-28 on interior face of doors, tops of shelves. 3. Visible Edges, Exposed and Semi-exposed (including edges of doors and drawers) a. PVC edge banding, color to be selected/approved by Architect. 2.06 PLASTIC LAMINATED COUNTER AND DESK TOPS A. Quality Standard: AWI Sections 400 and 4000 and related sections as referenced therein. B. Construction: 1. Type: High-pressure decorative laminate clad tops (HPDL). 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Core: Solid particleboard core. Marine grade plywood at sinks. Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 06 4100 - 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK tgba -Project #08062.02 C. Plastic Laminate Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1. Exposed Surfaces: a. Non-postformed surfaces: GP-50 (0.050-inch nominal thickness). t b. Postformed surfaces: PF-42 (post formed, 0.042 inch nominal thickness) 2. Back Surfaces: a. Top: Standard 0.020-inch backup sheet required. ' b. Backsplash: Backup sheet is required. 3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Details as indicated. 4. lop Mounted Backsplashes: Self-edged, same cladding material as on face. ' 2,07 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. C. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. D. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers. E. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish. ' F. Catches: Magnetic. G. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Standard extension. 2. Load Capacity:. a. Typical: 75 pound minimum. b. File CabineUPaper Storage Drawers: 100 pounds minimum load capacity. c. Printer Cabinet: Load capacity, 200 pounds. Grant 826. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. 6. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com. b. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. H. Hinges: 1. Manufacturers: ' a. Julius Blum, Inc: www.bium.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. 2. European type, all-metal including bosses; 120 degree swing except 100 degree swing where cabinet abuts a wall. Screws to be coarse thread, minimum size #10, semi-recessed. Quantity as recommended by manufacturer for size and weight of door. Blum. a. Doors with pulls: Self-closing type. b. Doors without pulls: Free-swinging type. 3. Heavy Duty 5 Knuckle; I. Grommet: ' 1. 3" black plastic with removable cover J. Support Bracket ' 1. Knape and Vogt 208 WH 400. 20 October 2010 ' 06 4100 - 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK tgba -Project #08062.02 K. Pharmacy Lock: 1. Electronic: Codelock CL12000 2. Mechanical: LG Combination Camlock 2.08 FINISHES L~' A. B. Plastic Laminate -Color, patterns, and finishes as scheduled in Section 01 9000. Cabinet Hardware: Satin polished chrome plated, BHMA 626 (US26D, except where indicated ' otherwise. ) PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. ' B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 3.02 1NSTALLATION -CASEWORK A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. C Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. Use concealed oint fasteners t ali n and ure adjoini cabinet units . g . ng j o sec D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1132 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to , match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. G. Locate and size reinforcement of stud walls during wall erection by trade involved to support H. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. , Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION -TOPS ' A. Where practicable, install each top as a single continuous unit without intermediate joints. B. Where multiple units are necessary, abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal support placed to prevent any deflection. 1. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices. 2. Make field jointing in same manner as factory jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 3. Locate joints in visual obscure locations. Indicate joint locations on shop drawings. C. No exposed fasteners at countertops. D. After installation, carefully dress joints smooth and remove surface scratches. Clean exposed surfaces. E. Install grommets at countertop where electrical, voice/data devices and outlets are indicated below countertops. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.05 CLEANING Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 06 4100 - 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB i~ 1 u 1 SECTION 06 6116 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL A. Section Includes: Molded plastic countertops and trim. B. Related Sections: 1. 06 4100 -Architectural Wood Casework. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 01 6000. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for molded plastic material; identify proposed color. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, fastening methods, relevant field dimensions, and relationship to adjoining construction. D. Submit letter from the molded plastic manufacturer's distributor, verifying that the fabricator meets all qualification requirements. E. Sample: Submit sample of typical edge and backsplash detail. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified by the molded plastic materials manufacturer. A. In accordance with Section 01 6000 Product Requirements 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Furnish manufacturer's standard 10 year guarantee covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Color: per Section 01 9000 Material Color and Pattern Standards. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate molded plastic to the configurations indicated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Use 1/4 inch thick sheets at vertical applications only. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable 20 October 2010 06 6116 - 1 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install molded plastic fabrications firmly in position and in proper alignment with adjacent construction B. Seal joints between molded plastic and adjacent construction with color matching sealant. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 06 6116 - 2 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL fgba - Project x'08062.02 SECTION 06 6400 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid Polymer Fabrications in Suspended Applications 2. Sculpture B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit per Section 01 3300. B. Product Data; Indicate product description and fabrication information. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Samples: 1. Submit minimum 3 inch by 3 inch samples, Indicate full color and pattern variation. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Submit minimum 3 inch by 3 inch sample for each type, texture, pattern and color of solid polymer. F. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including care, repair and cleaning instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide original fire test reports to ensure compliance with the following requirements: 1. Rate of Burning: a. ASTM D635CIass: CC1 for a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) 2. Self-Ignition Temperature: a. ASTM D1929: greater than 650°F 3. Density of Smoke: a_ ASTM D2843: Less than 75% 4. Flammability Classification: a. ASTM E-84: Smoke less than 450, Flame spread less than 75. B. Impact Resistance: Provide Solid Polymer Fabrications that comply with the following requirements: 1. Impact Strength, Un-notched (23°), ASTM D4812: No breakage 2. Impact Strength, Notched (23°), ASTM D526: 88J/m (1/16) C. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Maximum deflection: 1/16" over 12" D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockup of Solid Polymer Fabrication. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial 20 October 2010 06 6400 - 1 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB Completion. ' 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver Solid Polymer Fabrications, system components and accessories to Project site until r areas are ready for installation B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent ' damage or staining following installation for duration of project. C. Before installing Solid Polymer Fabrications, permit them to reach room temperature. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install Solid Polymer Fabrications until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, and ambient temperatures and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. i.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard form agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in material or workmanship ' within the specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Product: 1. See Section 01 9000. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Resin Sheet: 1. Engineered polyester resin, Glycol modified. 2. Sheet Size: Maximum 4' x 8' or 4' x 10' 3. Thickness: Minimum 1/16" 4. Interlayer Materials: Compatible with Polyester and bonding process to create a monolithic sheet of material when complete. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate Solid Polymer Fabrications to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles and other characteristics are indicated on the drawings. B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for fabrication. C. Machining: Ensure that material is not chipped or warped by machining operations. D. Forming: Form products to shapes indicated using appropriate methods. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Laminating: Laminate to substrates indicated using adhesives and techniques recommended by manufacturer. F. Edge Sealing: UV Seal and Polish to gloss all exposed edges 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape required for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 20 October 2010 06 6400 - 2 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS 1 tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Cleaner: Type recommended by manufacturer. C. Channels: 1. Hat Channel: CR Laurence: HCIWHSL {white) 2. Base Channel: CR Laurence: WU3ASL (satin anodized) D. Fasteners: Use screws designed specifically for plastics. Self-threading screws are acceptable for permanent installations. Provide threaded metal inserts for applications requiring frequent disassembly such as light fixtures. E. Bonding Cements: Solvent or adhesives, suitable for use with product and application. F. Drilled Panel Wall Anchors: Decor Cable, FMSPVC Wall Anchor. Provide extensions to accommodate thicknesses scheduled or illustrated. 3.01 EXAMINATION PART 3 EXECUTION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of Solid Polymer Fabrications will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements specified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for the installation of Solid Polymer Fabrications. B. Shop fabricates items to the greatest degree possible. C. Utilize fasteners, adhesives and bonding agents recommended by manufacturer for type of installation indicated. Material that is chipped, warped, hazed or discolored as a result of installation or fabrication methods will be rejected. D. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. E. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures. Locate seams in panels so that they are not directly in line with seams in substrates. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair work or replace damaged work, which cannot be repaired. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 06 6400 - 3 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB' SECTION OS 1213 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Section 08 1216 -Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08 7100 -Door Hardware. 1 1 1 C. Section 09 9000 -Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSIIICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ASTM E 1408 -Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems, 2000. C. NAAMM HMMA 840 -Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. D. NFPA 80 -Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS E. NFPA 252 -Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of SDI-100, ANSI A151.1, NAAMM/HMMA 802-87 and other specifications herein named. Test reports shall be submitted upon request. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Manufacturers named in Part 2 of this section with not less than 5 years experience in manufacturing commercial doors and frames of the type indicated. 2. Material Supplier: a. A recognized architectural hollow metal door and frame supplier who has been furnishing hollow metal in the same state as the project for a period of not less than 5 years. b. Hardware supplier's organization shall include an experienced Certified Door Consultant (CDC), certified by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI}, who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's opening requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. c. Hollow metal supplier shall have warehousing facilities and an Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 20 October 2010 08 1213 - 1 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB or Warnock Hersey (W H) approved fabrication shop for service to the contractor for the duration of the project, and the owner for post construction requirements. Supplier will be a factory authorized distributor of all materials specified. 3. Installer: Company specializing in installing work of this section with not less than 3 years experience and acceptable to the manufacturer and the door and frame supplier. Maintain regular work force of qualified personnel, trained, skilled, and experienced in installing doors, frames and door hardware if applicable, and constant, competent supervision. , C. Conform to requirements of SDI 100, ANSI A151.1, NAAMM/HMMA 802-87 and other specifications herein named. Test reports shall be submitted upon request. D. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Manufacturers named in Part 2 of this section with not less than 5 years experience in manufacturing commercial doors and frames of the type indicated. a. Material Supplier: ' b. A recognized architectural hollow metal door and frame supplier who has been furnishing hollow metal in the same state as the project for a period of not less than 5 years. c. Hardware supplier's organization shall include an experienced Certified Door Consultant ' (CDC), certified by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's opening requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. , d. Hollow metal supplier shall have warehousing facilities and an Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) approved fabrication shop for service to the contractor for the duration of the project, and the owner for post construction requirements. Supplier will be a factory authorized distributor of all materials specified. , E. Installer: Company specializing in installing work of this section with not less than 3 years experience and acceptable to the manufacturer and the door and frame supplier. Maintain regular work force of qualified personnel, trained, skilled, and experienced in installing doors, frames and door hardware if applicable, and constant, competent supervision. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Frames shall conform to applicable codes for fire ratings, egress and handicap access. All interior vertical stairwell and exit corridor doors shall carry a minimum 450° temperature rise rating in addition to the required fire rating per the requirements of IBC-2006. ' B. Underwriters' Laboratories and Warnock Hersey, labeled fire frames: 1. All labeled fire frames shall be of a type, which has been investigated and tested in accordance with UL-10(c), ASTM E-152, NFPA 252, ANSI A2.2. ' 2. Underwriters' Laboratories labeled frames shall be manufactured under the UL factory inspection program and in strict compliance to UL procedures, and shall provide a degree of fire protection, heat transmission and panic loading capability indicated by the opening class. 3. Warnock Hersey labeled frames shall be manufactured to meet the specific requirements of that labeling agency's current procedure for the tested hourly rating designated and shall be subject to inspection by representatives of the labeling agency. 4. A physical label or approved marking shall be affixed to the fire door frame at an authorized facility ' as evidence of compliance with procedures of the labeling agency. Provide code compliant "S" labels where required by local jurisdiction. 5. Materials which will not conform to the requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories or Warnock ' Hersey should be qualified with the Architect prior to the bid opening for determination as to direction. With local jurisdiction approval, provide labels which indicate proper fire resistive construction, however, units involved have not been tested for proper label application. If local jurisdiction will not waive the proper label requirement, it is the responsibility of the hollow metal , supplier to coordinate a legal application which will suit both the Architect's and the Owner's requirements. If not documented prior to the initial bid award, there will be no cost increase to ' 20 October 2010 ' 08 1213 - 2 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 1 1 1 1 tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB either the Architect, General Contractor or the Owner. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. C. Storage of Frames: Frames shall be stored under cover on 4" (101.6 mm) wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not use non vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting. Assembled frames shall be stored in a vertical position, five units maximum in a stack. Provide a 1/4" (6.35 mm) space between frames to promote air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Frames and frame components shall be manufactured from galvanized steel having an A60 zinc coating conforming to ASTM specification A525, A526, orA642. Galvanized steel shall be treated to insure proper paint adhesion. All component parts used in galvanized frames shall meet the galvanize specification. Frames and frame components shall be cold rolled steel, conforming to these specifications. As an acceptable option, frames and frame components may be supplied with a paintable galvanealed process, which will meet the established criteria for durability and paint adhesion. 2.02 STEEL DOOR FRAMES A. All frames shall be as detailed in the contract documents. B. Construction of Frames 1. Exterior frames shat! be formed from 14 gauge galvanized steel (see Section 2.1 B). Interior frames to 48" wide shall be 16-gauge cold rolled steel. Interior frames over 48" wide shall be formed from 14 gauge cold rolled steel. Borrowed lights (relites) shall be formed from 16-gauge material. Side or transom lights shall conform to the gauge of the door frame attached. 2. All frames shall be set-up and arc-welded. 3. Alt frames shall be prepared for inserted type rubber bumpers, provided under Section 08710 - Finish Hardware, (3) per strike jamb at single door applications and (4) per head at pairs of doors. Holes shall be omitted where gaskets are provided under Section 08710. 4. Frames shall have minimum 8-gauge steel hinge reinforcements and will have the manufacturer's standard high frequency hinge reinforcement at all hinge locations. Strike reinforcements shall be 16-gauge. Alf hinge and strike reinforcements shall be projection welded to the door frame. Metal plaster guards shall be provided for all mortised cutouts. Reinforcements for surface closer shall be 14-gage steel. 5. Adequate reinforcements shall be provided for other hardware as required for proper installation. Provide closer reinforcements for all frames whether or not closers are specified. 6. Galvanized frames shat( have galvanized hardware reinforcements. 7. Frames shall be furnished with a minimum of six C. Requirements for All Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. D. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner 20 October 2010 08 1213 - 3 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB pumpable grout is prohibited. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- orshop-assembled frames. D. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section OS 7100. 2.04 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Grouting of frames: be field applied. If grout with an anti-freeze agent is used, frames shall be coated with a fibered asphalt (bituminous) coating prior to grout application. Fibered asphalt coating shall be field applied, by the frame installer, to a minimum 1/16" thickness. 1. Grout: Masonry grout, 4" slump maximum. Hand-troweled in place. 2.05 f ABRICATION A. rames shall be supplied set up with faces at all joints arc-welded and ground smooth and primed with a zinc rich primer. Weld shall penetrate the inside face. Along with the manufacturer's standard mechanical corner attachment, frames shall be spot welded across the full jamb depth for added structural strength. B. Provide temporary spreader bars to protect frames during shipping and storage. Tack weld spreader bars as necessary to provide adequate support and to enable easy removal prior to installation without leaving visible blemishes. Spreader bars are for shipping and storage protection only and are to be removed prior to installation. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. All frames and frame components shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished as standard with one coat of baked-on rust inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the ANSI A224.1 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames". Primer shall be compatible with finishes as specified in Section 09900 -Painting. B. As an alternate, a paintable galvanealed finish is acceptable in lieu of the prime finish contingent upon test results for durability and paint adhesion meeting or exceeding established primer criteria. Submit test results with shop drawings. Where the galvanized process is removed due to required welding, affected areas shall be touched up with a zinc rich primer designed for use with galvanized products. Galvanealed process will include a written conditional ten year warranty against rust through and for paint adhesion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect door frames, borrowed light (relite) frames and doors prior to door installation. B. Verify that the door frames are properly manufactured, aligned and capable of providing trouble free support for doors throughout the range of door swing. C. Do not install damaged or defective materials. D. Inspect adjacent substrates, prior to installation, to ensure proper attachment and support for door and borrowed light frames. E. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before installing products of this section. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions by the installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Frames shall be installed in accordance with "Door and Hardware Institute" publication, "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" and/or as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Labeled doors and frames shall be installed to comply with requirements of NFPA-80 and as noted in 20 October 2010 08 1213 - 4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB paragraph 3.1A. C. Grout and/or bonding material shall be cleaned off frames immediately following installation. Keep surfaces clean of grout, tar, or other bonding material or sealer. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Adjust doors for proper operation for the full range of swing. Coordinate with the finish hardware application. Replace frames which, when applied with proper finish hardware, cannot be adjusted to perform within required parameters. B. Repair and prime door finishes damaged during installation in a manner which results in the door showing no evidence of the restoration. If the repaired door cannot be finished to the satisfaction of the Architect or Owner, the door shall be replaced at the contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 08 1213 - 5 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES tgba -Project #08062,02 SECTION 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated, non-rated, and acoustical. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 9000 -Material Color and Pattern Standards B. Section 08 1213 -Hollow Metal Frames. C. Section 08 7100 -Door Hardware. D. Section 08 8000 -Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 80 -Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers. E. Samples: Submit four samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Submit complete schedule indicating dimensions, cutouts, hardware sets, stain color selection and other pertinent data which references the individual architectural door mark number as shown on the plan sheets. G. Submit manufacturer's data sheets, completely describing door construction, WDMA I.S. 1-A (formerly NWWDA) and AWI classifications. H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. C. Wood veneer faced doors shall conform to the latest edition of WDMA I.S. 1-A premium grade standards. D. Tolerances for warp, telegraphing, squareness and prefitting dimensions shall be as per the latest edition of WDMA I.S. 1-A and AWI Section 1300. E. Each door shall bear an identifying label indicating the manufacturer, door number, order number, as well as fire rating as applicable. 20 October 2010 08 1416 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB F. Supplier: 1. A recognized architectural wood door supplier who has been furnishing wood doors in the same state as the project for a period of not less than 5 years. 2. Wood door supplier's organization shall include an experienced Certified Door Consultant (CDC), certified by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), who is physically available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's wood door requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. Mail or telephone correspondence is not acceptable. G. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Where fire rated doors are required, provide doors labeled by ITS/Warnock Hersey International or Underwriters Laboratories. Construction details and hardware application shall be as approved by the labeling agency and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Fire rated doors shall be manufactured in compliance with IBC-2000 and UL-10C requirements for positive pressure. Intumescent materials, when required, shall be concealed in the door edge. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. D. Deliver doors, per general contractor's requirements, after the building is enclosed, dry, heated and adequately ventilated. Do not receive or store doors in damp areas. E. Store doors on a flat level surface. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for proper storage and handling of wood doors. F. Do not subject doors to extreme conditions or changes in heat, dryness or humidity in accordance with the latest edition of WDMA I.S. 1-A. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Any defects noted during the warranty period shall be corrected at no cost to the owner. Such corrective work shall include all labor and material for repair, replacement and rehanging as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All wood doors shall meet criteria for the latest edition of WDMA I.S. 1-A Premium Grade. B. Doors shall be faced with hardwood veneers as specified with 1/8" minumum hardwood crossbands. Face veneers are to be a minimum thickness of 1/42 of an inch before sanding. C. Stile edges of doors shall be of face veneer matching materials, minumum '/." before machining. Veneered edges are not acceptable. D. Top and bottom rails shall be factory sealed with an approved wood sealer. E. Doors shall be prefit and beveled both vertical edges at the factory to fit the openings. Prefit tolerances shall be in accordance with the requirements of WDMA I.S. 1-A latest edition and per the requirements of NFPA-80 as applicable. Doors shall be machined in the factory for mortised hardware items. Through bolt holes for hardware 20 October 2010 08 1416 - 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS h Cli i are n c tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Times Yelm MOB attachment of hardware items requiring through bolts (I.E. surface mounted overhead stops) shall be done in the field by the hardware installer. Include hinge screw pilot holes as standard machining. G. Vision panels for non-rated and 20 minute rated doors shall be wood of a similar species to the specified veneer. Doors over 20 minute rated shall have metal vision kits with applied wood veneers of a similar species to the specified veneer. Both types shall be factory finished to match the approved samples. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate all doors in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1-A Premium Grade, 5-ply or 7-ply construction. 9-ply construction is not acceptable. 1. To match HDWD-1, see 01 9000 for Species and Finish. 2. Thickness:13/4" r B. Stiles to be a minimum 1-318" wide (before prefitting) structural composite lumber (SCL) edged with matching hardwood per 2.1-C. Fire rated doors will incorporate a fire retardent edge in compliance with their fire testing requirements with screw holding capabilities equal to or better than the SCL materials specified. The door manufacturer shall drill 5/32" diameter pilot holes for all template hinge screws. C. Rails to be a minimum 1-3/8" wide (before prefitting) structural composite lumber (SCL). Fire rated doors will incorporate a fire retardent edge in compliance with their fire testing requirements. D. Cores for non-rated and 20 minute fire rated doors shall be particleboard, 28-32 pounds per cubic foot average density. Comply with particleboard standard ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-2. Cores for fire rated doors which exceed 20 minutes shall be anon-combustible mineral board, 30.8-34.7 pounds per cubic foot, containing no asbestos. Mineral board doors shall have the manufacturer's standard hardware blocking system for all surface applied hardware that will allow mounting hardware without through bolts. E. Stiles and rails shall be glued to the core and the entire unit sanded flat as a unit to ensure minimal telegraphing of core components through face veneers. F. Veneers are to be applied to the core in a hot press using Type I or II adhesive. Five or seven ply 1 construction. Veneers to be slip-matched. G. Fire rated doors shall include all requirements of IBC-2000 positive pressure per testing results of ' UL-10C or ITS/VVarnock Hersey Internation Catagory A Guidelines, as part of the door construction. Intumescents (hot smoke seals), if required, will be a concealed portion of the door edge. All fire rated doors will bear a factory applied "S" label. Cold smoke gaskets will be frame applied and supplied under Section 08710 -Finish Hardware. ' H. Provide manufacturer's standard reinforcements for surface applied hardware on mineral core fire doors to allow application of hardware without the use of sex nuts or through bolts including lock blocks, closer reinforcements, intermediate rails and any other application which may affect the opening. I. Manufacturers: 1. Any member of WDMA or AWI meeting or exceeding the requirements of this specification. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Louvers: 1. Louver Blade: Flush louver. B. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Wood, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING -WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard: 20 October 2010 ' 081416 - 3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1. AW I System TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane, premium grade, clear finish (no stain). , 2. Top and bottom rails shall be factory sealed with an approved wood sealer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. Carefully inspect the locations where the doors are to be ' installed. Notify the general contractor of any conditions which would adversely affect the installation or the subsequent operation of the door. Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. D. Allow doors to become acclimated to building temperature and humidity before installation. E. Where field fitting is required, field finish and seal all exposed edges within 48 hours. F. Use only skilled mechanics to install and adjust the finish hardware from section 08710. G. Retain factory packaging to protect doors for the remainder of the construction period. H. Replace or rehang doors which do not swing or operate freely, or do not conform to specified tolerances. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squarenes. C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE -See Drawings END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 08 1416 - 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB SECTION 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated steel door and frame units for access to concealed space. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Partition and Soffit Construction: Gypsum board on metal framing. B. Locations: 1. Ceiling access. 2. Partition access. C. Fire Resistance Classifications: UL or WHI listed and labeled assembly matching or exceeding ' classification of construction in which mounted. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (FRD} -Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Access Doors: 1. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 2. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. ' 3. J.L.Industires. 4. Nystrom, Inc. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 1. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS -WALL ACCESS A. Access Door Design: Milcor products specified to establish quality and style for location: 1. Drywall or Veneer Plaster: Style MS 3202-430 with steel cam latch. 2. Drywall -Fire Rated: Karp 250FR. 1 B. Construction: ' 20 October 2010 08 3100 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1. Frame: 20 gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. 2. Door Panel: 14 gauge electro-galvanized steel. 3. Hardware: a. Continuous hinge. b. Flush, screwdriver operated steel cam latch. C. Finish: Phosphatized, with baked-on rust inhibitive primer coat. Final coat to be selected by Architect. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS -CEILING ACCESS A. Access Panel Design: The ceiling access hatch is to be clad with 5/8-inch gypsum board for installation in drywall construction. 1. Size: 18 x 18 inches. 2. Product: Type KSTDW/CAD as manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc., with key wrench operated lock. 3. Located at all toilet rooms and as noted on plans. B. Construction: 1. Frame: 20 gauge hot dipped galvanized steel- 2. Door: 20 gauge galvanized steel, lined with 3/8-inch thick fiberboard and clad with 1/2" gyp board for installation in drywall construction. 3. Trim: Galvanized steel drywall bead. 4. Gasketing: Flame retardant polyurethane. 5. Locks: Key /wrench operated, square head, with plastic grommets. 6. Hinge: Concealed pivot rod with controlled action device. C. Finish: Phosphatized, with baked-on rust inhibitive prime coat. Finish coat to be selected by Architect_ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 08 3100 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 1 tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 r i~ t SECTION 08 7100 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES DOOR HARDWARE A. Hardware for swinging, sliding, and folding doors except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in other sections. 1.02 DOOR HARDWARE TYPES A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware is indicated elsewhere in this section or in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. Refer to Part 2 Products for Manufacturer's identification and allowable substitutions. B. Do not substitute other products without Architect's written prior approval per Section 01630. Requests for approval shall be submitted by factory authorized distributor firms representing the products proposed for substitution. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Manufacturers named in Part 2 of this section with not less than 5 years experience in manufacturing commercial door hardware of the type indicated. 2. Hardware Supplier: a. A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same state as the project for a period of not less than 5 years. b. Hardware supplier's organization shall include an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), certified by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), who is physically available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. Mail or telephone correspondence is not acceptable. c. Hardware supplier shall have local warehousing facilities and shall maintain an adequate parts inventory of items supplied for future service to the owner. Supplier will be a factory authorized distributor of all hardware specified. 3. Installer: Company specializing in installing work of this section with not less than 3 years experience and acceptable to the manufacturer and the hardware supplier. Maintain regular work force of qualified personnel, trained, skilled, and experienced in installing door hardware and constant, competent supervision. The hardware installer shall meet with the representative of the general contractor and hardware supplier to jointly inventory all hardware items. Upon satisfactory .inventory of products, the hardware installer accepts responsibility for all hardware items inventoried. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide hardware for fire rated openings, whether specified or not, in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80, IBC-2003 as adopted by the State of Washington and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL or W HI for types and sizes of doors required. Hardware must comply with requirements of door and door frame labels. 2. Provide hardware that meets or exceeds handicap accessibility per local building code requirements. Conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Under provisions of Section D1340, submit the following: 1. Product information: Manufacturer's published technical product data for all specified door hardware items indicating compliance with the requirements. 20 October 2010 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 2. Hardware Schedule: a. Hardware schedules are intended for the Contractor's coordination of the work. Review and acceptance by the Architect or Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified. b. Submit hardware schedule in the manner and format as specified, complying with the actual construction progress schedule requirements for each draft. Include the following information: 1) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, at the like, including door handing. 2) Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. 3) Door and frame sizes and materials cross-referenced to the Architect's marks in the door schedule. 4) Room identification (name and number) on each side of door opening as indicated on the drawings. 5} Product name, model number, description, and name of manufacturer of each item. 6) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 7) Locations of hardware cross-referenced to architectural floor plans and door schedules. 8) Mounting heights and locations of each type of hardware. 3. Key Schedule: a. Require qualified representative of the hardware supplier to personally meet with the Owner and obtain the Owner's written key requirements. b. Include a separate key schedule, showing clearly how the Owner's instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. 4. Samples: Upon request, submit actual material samples of items indicated as for color selection. 5. Templates: Hardware supplier will furnish hardware templates to the Contractor for each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be shop prepared or factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request check shop drawings of such other work, to conform that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 6. Warranty: Provide the manufacturer's standard warranty for each product, not to be less than ane year after acceptance of the building by the owner. Door closers shall not be warranted for less than ten years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.07 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: 1. Provide all door hardware for complete work, in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. 2. Quantities listed, in any instance, are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. 3. Provide items and quantities not specifically mentioned to ensure a proper and complete operational installation. Match the quality and finish of items specified. 4. Provide miscellaneous hardware as listed in hardware groups. B. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Door schedule indicates door and frame sizes, materials, required fire ratings, and other pertinent information. Fumish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 1. Screws: Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finishes of such other work as closeiy as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 2. Concealed Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed 20 October 2010 OS 7100 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 1 1 1 1 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex-nut & bolt fasteners. 2.02 HINGES A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Stanley 2. Approved Substitutions: Bommer, Ives B. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. C. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated, but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90" or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. D. Quantity: 1-1/2 pair up to and including 90" in height. For doors over 90" in height supply one additional butt for each additional 30" in height, or fraction thereof. E. All exterior and interior reverse bevel locked doors to have non-removeable pins (NRP set screw in barrel). 2.03 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Schlage 2. Approved Substitutions: None (Schlage is the building standard) B. Equip locks with interchangeable construction cores for use until substantial completion. C. Provide final cores utilizing Schlage's Everest Restricted keyway, matching the keyway used for the project. D. Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 2.04 KEYS, KEYING, AND KEY CONTROL A. Keys: 1. Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. 2. Quantities: These quantities are to establish a maximum allowable quantity of cut keys to service the project and may not necessarily be assigned as noted. A lesser quantity of cut keys required will not result in any credits, nor a quantity of uncut keys to be issued unless noted otherwise. a. 3 change keys per each cylinder unit. b. 5 master keys per master. c. 3 control keys d. 10 construction keys. 3. Deliver keys to the Owner's representative: Send Masterkeys to Owner via U.S. registered mail direct from hardware supplier. 4. Provide visual key control (VKC) for all keys, and inscribe each key with the notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE". B. Keying: 1. Comply with Owner's written instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change keys for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. Sheii and core key system will be the key system for the tenant spaces. Allow for expansion as required. 2. Grandmaster key all cylinder items to the existing grand master key system already established by King Door & Hardware (509-453-9670). Coordinate with the Owner's instructions. 3. Provide concealed key control (CKC) for all cylinders, marked with the appropriate key symbol. 2.05 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, AND PRIVACY SETS: 20 October 2010 08 7100 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Doar Hardware Schedule: Schlage 2. Approved Substitutions: None (Schlage is the building standard) B. Types: Locksets, latchsets, and privacy sets as indicated in Door Hardware Schedule. C. Lock Throw: Provide 3/4" minimum throw of mortise type latches and deadbolts used. Cylindrical latches will be 1/2" minimum. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. D. Design: Sparta E. Finish: 626-AM (brushed chrome with Anti-Microbial finish). 2.06 EXIT DEVICES AND MULLIONS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Von Duprin 2. Approved Substitutions: None (Von Duprin is the building standard) B. Provide glass bead shim kits, as needed, to prevent interference with door glazing kits. C. Provide spacers as needed for proper application of removable mullions on narrow stop type frames. 2.07 CLOSERS: A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Falcon 2. Approved Substitutions: None (Falcon is the building standard) B. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. Provide drop plates as needed to prevent glazing interference. Provide blade stop spacers as needed at aluminum frame applications. C. Mount all closers to the maximum allowable degree of opening by the closer manufacturer's template. Where closer arms incorporate dead stop features, mount closers to the maximum degree of opening available before conflict with adjacent structures. If not apparent on the contract documents, verify the use of open space with the Architect or Owner's Representative to determine the maximum allowable degree of opening. 2.08 OVERHEAD STOPS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Glynn Johnson 2. Approved Substitutions: None (Glynn Johnson is the building standard) B. Mount stops to the maximum degree of opening available before conflict with adjacent structures, or, if adjacent structures are not considered, to the maximum allowable by stop manufacturer's template. C. If not apparent on the contract documents, verify the use of open space with the Architect or Owner's Representative to determine the maximum allowable degree of opening. 2.09 WALL AND FLOOR STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions: Ives B, General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide stops (wall, floor or overhead) at each leaf of every swinging door leaf. 2.10 PROTECTION PLATES Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB C~ 20 October 2010 08 7100 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions: Ives, Tice B. Sizes: Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) not more than 2" less than door width on stop side and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side, x the height indicated. C. Metal Plates: Stainless Steei, 18 gauge, (0.050) thick. Satin finish (US32D, 630), beveled four edges (B4E). 2.11 GASKETS AND SWEEPS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Pemko 2. Approved Substitutions: National Guard B. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weather-stripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles indicated as drawn or scheduled. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Pemko 2. Approved Substitutions: National Guard B. Where there is conflict between scheduled thresholds and details, details shall have precedence. Revise details only if necessary to comply with handicap accessibility requirements. Notify the Architect of such required modifications. C. Anchors: Provide stainless steel wood screws with plastic anchors (SSWS/PA). 2.13 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule: Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions: Ives 2.14 FINISHES A. Exposed surfaces of hardware shall be Satin Stainless Steel (US32D, 630), unless otherwise indicated. Hardware specified in Satin Stainless Steel shall be provided in stainless steel with no exceptions. 2.15 GROUPS A. H01 3 HINGES ST F66179 4-112 X 4-1 /2 652 1 LATCHSET SC ND10S SPARTA 626AM 1 CLOSER FA SC81 X 689 1 KICK PLATE TR K0050 10 X 2"LDW X 630 1 STOP TR 1270CX X 626 3 SILENCER TR 1229-A B. H02 3 HINGES ST FB6179 4-112 X 4-1/2 652 1 LATCHSET SC ND10S SPARTA 626AM 20 October 2010 08 7100 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 STOP TR 1270CX X 626 , , 3 SILENCER TR 1229-A C. H03 6 HINGES ST FBB179 4-1 /2 X 4-1 /2 652 NRP 2 FBOLT TR 3917 X 626 , 1 DPS TR 3911 X 626 1 EL LOCK SC AD200-CY-70-PPK--SPA-626AM-46-TD 1 FINAL CORE SC 23-030 X 626 CONC OH 2 STOP GJ 410SX652 2 SILENCER TR 1229-A D. H04 3 HINGES ST FBB168 5 X 4-1/2 652 ' 1 LATCHSET SC ND10S SPARTA 626AM 1 CLOSER FA SC81 X 689 1 KICK PLATE TR K0050 10 X 2"LDW X 630 1 STOP TR 1270CX X 626 3 SILENCER TR 1229-A E. H05 3 HINGES ST F66179 5 X 4-112 652 ' 1 LATCHSET SC ND10S SPARTA 626AM 1 STOP TR 1270CX X 626 3 51LENCER TR 1229-A F. H06 3 HINGES ST F66179 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 652 1 LOCKSET SC ND80TD SPARTA 626AM 1 FINAL CORE SC 23-030 X 626 1 3 STOP SILENCER TR TR 1270CX X 626 1229-A G. H07 3 HINGES ST FBB179 5 X 4-1/2 652 NRP 1 1 LOCKSET SC ND80TD SPARTA 626AM 1 FINAL CORE SC 23-030 X 626 1 STOP TR 1270CX X 626 20 October 2010 08 7100 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 3 SILENCER TR 1229-A H. H08 1 PCKT HDW JO 153070PF 1 PCKT LOCK ACC 2002 CPDL-3 X S2002T X S2002C 1 CYLINDER SC 30-001 X 626 I. H09 3 HINGES ST FB6179 4-112 X 4-1/2 652 1 PRIVACY SC L9496J X 17A X 626AM 1 FINAL CORE SC 23-030 X 626 1 MOP PLATE TR KM050 4" X 1 "LDW X 630 1 STOP TR 1270CX X 626 3 SILENCER TR 1229-A PART 1 EXECUTION 3.07 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, requirements of NFPA 80, UBC, ADA, and Washington State Rules and Regulations for Barrier Free Facilities and recommendations of the DHI. B. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. D. Where not factory machined, machine cut for hardware per template, as required. E. Surface mounted hardware to be prepped & drilled in field. Mortised hardware to be prepped in the shop by the door supplier, except where not practical (mortise strikes for pocket door jambs). 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: 1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Adjust resilient faced sound stops for continuous contact with door and threshold. Adjust weather-stripping and sweeps to completely seal doors with frames and to adjacent structures. 2. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, the hardware installer shall return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area, the hardware installer shall: 1. Retum to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. 20 October 2010 08 7100 - 7 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware and submit to the Architect. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 08 7100 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB i~ ~I ~I SECTION 08 8000 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. GLASS AND GLAZING B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 1213 -Hollow Metal Frames: Glazed borrowed lites. 1 I1 ~J 1 1 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS B. Section 08 1416 -Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors. A. ANSI 297.1 -American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004. B. GANA (GM) -GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004. C. GANA {SM) -FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. D. IBC, Chapter 24 -Glass and Glazing Requirements 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch minimum in size of glass units. D. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Test reports for sealant-substrate adhesion and sealant compatibility. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. C. Fire Resistance Rated Glazing: Each light shall bear permanent, non-removable label of UL or WHI certifying it for use in tested and rated fire resistive assemblies. D. Safety Glazing Standard: ANSI 797.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. 20 October 2010 08 8000 - 1 GLASS AND GLAZING tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Primary Glass Manufacturers: 1. Ford Glass 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. LOF Glass, Inc. 4. PPG Company 5. Cesarcolor, Inc. 6. Milgard B. Substitutions: Comply with requirements of Section 01 6000. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sizes: Fabricate glass of thickness indicated and to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass Manufacturer. All exterior glazing to be fabricated in insulating units. B. Primary Glass (clear float): ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality Q3. Thickness shall be 6-mm (1/4-inch) nominal thick float, unless noted otherwise. Insulating Low E glazing to be used at all exterior locations. C. Wire Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality Q3, with embedded wires in diagonal pattern at 1/2" on center in each direction. Thickness shall be 6-mm (1/4-inch) nominal thick float, unless noted otherwise. Glass shall be U.L. listed for fire doors. D. Heat-Treated Safety Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent, flat), Class 1 (clear), 6 mm thick float unless otherwise indicated. E. Laminated Safety Glass: Two layers 3 mm thick clear annealed float glass laminated together with 0.030 inch thick clear plastic interlayer. F. Radiation Shielding Glass: see section 13090. G. Obscured Glass. H. Mirrors: Float glass, ASTM C1036, Type 1 reflective, Class I. Quality 93, glazing select, '/4" thick minimum, finished edge. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Sealant: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass Manufacturers for selection of glass sealants which suit project application and installation conditions and which are compatible with surfaces contacted as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 1. Provide product complying with Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric requirements including those for type, grade, and class use. 2. Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Fire Rated Openings: Provide proprietary product used in fire tests of the glass. Except where another specific product is stipulated, provide GE 1000. B. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: ASTM C 864, extruded or molded neoprene, EPDM, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. C. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: ASTM C 509, Type II, black; extruded or molded neoprene. 20 October 2010 08 8000 - 2 GLASS AND GLAZING tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB i D. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by Manufacturer of sealants/gaskets. E. Blocks and Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone as required for compatibility with glazing sealants; of 80 to 90 Shore A hardness for setting blocks and, for spacers and edge blocks, of hardness recommended by glass and sealant Manufacturer for application indicated. F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed-cell orwaterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent compression. 2.04 GLAZING TYPES A. Type GL-5 -Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated. 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions. c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. PAR 01 3 T 3 MA EXECUTION NUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES . A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.02 CL EANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. ' B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.03 PR OTECTION ' ' A. After installation, mark pane with an X by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. 1 3.04 SC HEDULE A. See drawings. ' END OF SECTION ' 20 October 2010 08 8000 - 3 GLASS AND GLAZING tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Acoustic insulation. C. Gypsum sheathing. D. Cementitious backing board. E. Gypsum wallboard. F. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). B. ASTM C 475/C 475M -Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). C. ASTM C 665 -Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006. D. ASTM C 754 -Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2009a. E. ASTM C 840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2008. F. ASTM C 954 -Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2007. G. ASTM C 1002 -Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. H. GA-216 -Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2007. I. GA-600 -Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2009. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide gypsum drywall construction having fire-resistance ratings indicated. i3. Conform to assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by inspecting and testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Structural Performance of Interior Partition Systems: 1. Lateral Loading: 5 psf per IBC, 2003 Edition. 2. Deflection Limit: a. For Brittle Finishes: 11240 of span. b. For Gypsum Wallboard Finishes: 1/180 of span. c. For Flexible Finishes: 1/120 of span. D. Sound Transmission Classes (STC): 1. Untreated interior Partition: 35 minimum. 2. Sound partition: 45 minimum. 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 3. Shaft Wall System: 40 minimum. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide gypsum drywall construction having fire-resistance ratings indicated. B. Perform work in accordance with GA 216 -Standard Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board, published by the Gypsum Association. C. Thickness of metal framing components is specified by decimal thickness as currently favored by steel industry trade associations. (Refer ASTM A 525.) 1. Specified metal thickness is minimum acceptable for base metal, uncoated, unless specifically indicated as Manufacturer`s design thickness. 2. Gauge references are for convenience only and shall not be used to imply an acceptance of base metal thinner than the decimal thickness specified. 3. Fire rating requirements take precedence over construction requirements indicated. In event of conflict, notify Architect and do not proceed in area of conflict until resolved. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. E. Conform to assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by inspecting and testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Structural Performance of Interior Partition Systems: G. Lateral Loading: 5 psf per IBC, 2006 Edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gypsum board and related products by one of the listed Manufacturers. B. Steel Framing and Furring: 1. Dale Industries, Inc. 2. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 3. Marino Industries Corp. 4. Unimast Incorporated 5. Steeler 6. Scafco C. Grid Suspension System: 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation 2. National Rolling Mills Co. D. Gypsum Board; 1. Domtar Gypsum Co. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corp. 3. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 4. United States Gypsum Co. 5. Certainteed E. Substitutions: Comply with requirements of Section 01 6000. Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB 1 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB ' 2.02 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. ASTM C 754, unless otherwise indicated: B. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0568 inch thickness of base metal (16 gauge) and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 1. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lbs. per 1000 feet. 2. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches deep, 475 ibs. per 1000 feet. 3. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs. per 1000 feet. C. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, characteristics as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. 2. Thickness: 0.0179-inch minimum (25 gauge). D. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped. 1. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.0179-inch minimum (25 gauge). E. Grid Suspension Systems: ASTM C 645, Manufacturer's standard grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members which interlock to form modular supporting network. F. Wire supports: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant material, capable of sustaining load equal to 3 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined from testing per ASTM E 488 calculated loading. G. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 zinc coating. ' 2.03 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645 2.04 GYPSUM BOARD A. Provide gypsum board in maximum lengths available to minimize end joints. Thickness, 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated. 8. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, tapered edges. 1. Non-rated Assemblies: Regular Type. 2. Fire Rated Assemblies: Type X. C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multi-Layer Applications: ASTM C 442 or A 36. 1. Non-rated Assemblies: Regular Type. 2. Fire Rated Assemblies: Type X. ' 05 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD 2 . A. Gypsum core sheathing panel with additives to enhance the water resistance of the core. Surface with water repellant paper at front, back and long edges in compliance with ASTM C79. 2.06 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SOFFIT BOARDS A. A gypsum core soffit panel with additives to enhance the sag resistance of the core. Surface with water repellant paper on front, back and long side in compliance with ASTM C931. Provide tapered, beveled edges. 2.07 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. ASTM C 840, Manufacturer's standard trim accessories, including comer bead and edge trim of beaded type with face flanges for concealment in joint compound except where semi-finishing or exposed type is indicated. B. Provide comer bead formed from zinc alloy. ' C. Provide one-piece control joints with 1/4 inch wide by 7/16-inch deep V-shaped slot, covered with 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB removable tape, of roll-formed zinc or extruded vinyl as recommended by gypsum board Manufacturer 2.08 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. ASTM C 475 and ASTM C 840, complying with recommendations of Manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. Use open-weave glass fiber tape where recommended by gypsum board Manufacturer with use of setting-type joint compound. C. Setting-Type Joint Compound: Factory-prepackaged, job-mixed chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged, vinyl-based products: 1. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed. 2. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction which comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board Manufacturer: B. Laminating Adhesives: Product recommended for laminating gypsum boards. C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002. D. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant as specified in Section 07900 -Joint Sealants. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Cavity and Non-plenum Blankets: Unfaced glass or mineral fiber insulation complying with ASTM C 665, for Type I. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic {nsufation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiiber, friction flit type, unfaced. Thickness: appropriate to depth of framing. B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. 1. Product: QuietZone Acoustic Sealant manufactured by Owens Corning. 2. , or equivalent. C_ Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Powder-type vinyl-based joint compound. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. E. Screws for Attachment to Stee{ Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C 954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB ' 1. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement: a. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure at ceiling perimeters and at penetrations of structural elements. b. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure. 2. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joint with steel framing or furring members or as indicated. 3. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible. Otherwise connect to inserts, clips, other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. Maintain 2 inches clearance to hangers and braces. 5. Provide indirect-hung metal support system with carrying channels (main runners) spaced 4 feet o.c., hangers 4 feet o.c. along runners, and rigid furring members 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 6. Install direct-hung grid suspension system, including perimeter wall track or angle, with members spaced and installed to comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 7. Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls of masonry or concrete, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall. ' 8. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports above suspended ceilings, except where indicated otherwise. a. Continue framing over frames for doors and other openings. b. Frame around ducts to provide support for gypsum board. 9. Install steel studs at 16 inches on center except where otherwise indicated or required. 10. Frame door and other openings with studs and runners of the proper gauge, number and arrangement to comply with Manufacturer's recommendations for size of opening, weight and height of doors, and stud size, unless otherwise indicated. 11. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at openings and terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings ' and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board Manufacturer. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center unless noted otherwise. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. ' D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 ' inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 1. Orientation: Horizontal. 2. Spacing: As indicated. F. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements. ' 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 G. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel sheet blocking for support of: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Toilet partitions. 3. Toilet accessories. 4. Wall mounted door hardware. 5. Wall-mounted equipment in equipment rooms. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, without gaps and with support where necessary to prevent movement or dislocation. 1. Locate behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partition and tight to items passing through partitions. 2. Lay sound attenuation blankets over ceiling construction adjacent and parallel to sound insulated partitions and STC rated operable partitions. Extend blankets out 24 inches each side. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. 1. Install board panels to minimize number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 2. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings. 3. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. 4. Isolate drywall construction from abutting structural and masonry work. Provide edge trim and sealant as recommended by Manufacturer. 5. Do not bridge building expansion or control joints. Leave space of the width indicated between boards, and trim both edges for installation of sealant or gasket. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 1. Screw both layers to supports where double-layer work is indicated or otherwise required. 2. Direct Bonding: Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations where gypsum board is indicated to be directly bonded to substrate. D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 6 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paperjoint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic the and fixed cabinetry. 3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications. D. Fill and finish joints and comers of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FINISHES A. Definitions: Specified levels of finish represent finishes described in consensus document entitled Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish, as published byAWCI, CISCA, GA, and PDCA. B. Level 0 Finish: No taping, applied trim accessories, or finishing required. C. Level 1 Finish; 1. Embed joint tape in joint compound at gypsum board joints and interior angles. 2. After joint treatment, remove excess joint compound from gypsum board surfaces. 3, Apply trim accessories in corridors and other occupied areas. D. Leve12 Finish: 1, Embed joint tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles. 2. Apply separate coat of compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 3. Remove excess joint compound from gypsum board surfaces. E. Level 3 Finish: 1. Embed joint tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles. 2, Apply two separate coats of compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, surface defects, and trim accessories. 3. Finish joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 4. Remove excess joint compound from gypsum board and leave prepared surfaces ready to be coated with primer/sealer prior to application of final finishes. F. Level 4 Finish; 1, Embed joint tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles. 2, Apply three separate coats of compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, surface defects, and trim accessories. 3, Finish joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 4, Remove excess joint compound from gypsum board and leave prepared surfaces ready to be coated with primer/sealer prior to application of final finishes. G. Level 5 Finish: 1, Embed joint tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles. 2, Apply three separate coats of compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, surface defects, and trim accessories. 3. Finish joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 4. After joint treatment, apply skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, over exposed interior gypsum board surfaces. 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 7 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 5. Sand lightly, and leave prepared surfaces ready to be coated with primer/sealer prior to application of finish paint. 3.08 SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR FINISHES A. Level 0 Finish Not Used B. Level 1 Finish Plenum area above ceiling. C. Level 2 Finish Not Used. D. Level 3 Finish Nat Used. E. Level 4 Finish Surfaces to receive flat paints, matte, eggshell and semi-gloss finishes. F. Level 5 Finish Curved drywall surface, or surfaces lit by wall wash or valance lighting. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 118 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 09 2116 - 8 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 9000 -Material Color and Pattern Standards 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 2006 International Building Code (IBC) 1 B. ASTM C 635 -Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2009b. C. ASTM C 636/C 636M -Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2008. D. ASTM E 580/E 580M -Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2009a. E. ASTM E 1264 -Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008. F. UL (FRD) -Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. G. CISCA -Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association. Recommendations for seismic Zones 3-4. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other ceiling finishes, and related dimensioning and field verification dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide written statement ceritfying that ceiling suspension members, hangers, and spacing will safely support the entire system and reult in no deflection where supporting the specified loading. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide stock of each type of acoustic unit for future use. Deliver to the owner packaged and marked for identification. Furnish not less than one percent (1 %) of the total amount installed. B. Delivery of extra materials must include a delivery transmittal signed by the Owner acknowledging receipt of the correct type, color and quantity of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 20 October 2010 09 5100 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Units -General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. 1. Refer to Section 01 9000. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: Same as for acoustical units. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. B. Type and Finish: Formed from commercial quality cold-rolled steel, electro-zinc coated and pre-painted Exposed cap finish, low sheen satin white. C. Components: 1. Main Tee: With a double web design and with a rectangular bulb, 15/16" or 9/16" exposed flange with a rolled cap; with cross tee holes at six (6) inches o.c.; with hanger wire holes at two (2) inches o.c.; with integral reversible splice. 2. Cross Tee: With double web design with a rectangular bulb; with web extending to form a positive interlock between cross tee webs; with the lower flange extended and offset. D. Suspension Systems -General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. 2.03 FURRING CHANNELS A. Shalt be 1-1/2" x 1/2" x length, 16 gauge cold rolled, galvanized orrust-resistant painted, weighing 475 lbs. per thousand lineal feet. Surfaces shall be square and channel straight and true. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. 2. At Concealed Grid: Provide exposed L-shaped molding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M, ASTM E 580/E 580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 20 October 2010 09 5100 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each comer, or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. J. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with fire rated assembly requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. G. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.04 FINISHED SURFACES A. Clean, undamaged, free of sagging, uniform appearance. All joint lines straight, continuous, bevels uniform in width. All exposed metal straight and in same plane, B. All field cut tiles to fit true and snug fully into frames, free of defects. 3.05 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Make corrections from whatever cause until acceptance of building. Correct defects thereafter which are the result of faulty materials and workmanship. Correct all work that does not meet pertormance requirements of this Section. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 09 5100 - 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient the flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 9000 -Material Color and Pattern Standards Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Section 03 3000 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. C. Section 03 5493 - Cementitions Floor Underlayment. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire Resistance Requirements: 1. Fire: Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or more per NFPA 253 or ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: NBS Smoke of 450 or less per ASTM E 662. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 6"x6" in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed. 1. Package with protective coverings for storage. 2. Label each package or container with manufacturer's name, brand, color, and room locations. B. Quantities: 1. Resilient Base: 50 linear feet of each color minimum and one box of pre-molded corners. 2. Resilient Tile: One box for each 50 boxes installed; one box minimum. 3. Sheet Vinyl: 20 sq. feet PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Section 01 9000. 20 October 2010 09 6500 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING tgba -Project #08062.02 2.02 SHEET FLOORING A. Sheet Vinly Flooring complying with requirements specified in Sheet Vinly Flooring Product Data Sheet at end of the Section. 2.03 TILE FLOORING A. Marmoleum Composition Tile (MCT): ASTM F 2195 1. Homogeneous floor covering made of promarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil, wood flour, rosin binders, dry pigments mixed and colendared onto a polysester backing. 2. Size: 13" x 13" 3. Guage:0.080" 4. Backing: Polyester 5. 2.04 RESILIENT BASE A. Rubber Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I, and complying with requirements specified in Rubber Wall Base Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer B. Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Trowelable latex-modified Portland cement based floor fill and latex crack filler provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives: 1. Normal Use: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions. D. Resilient Edge Strips: Homogeneous vinyl moldings to suit edge and transition conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. ' C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials , manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 02 PREPARATION 3 , . A. Prepare sub-floor surfaces as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with ' sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface, C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Clean substrate. 3.03 IN STALLATION ' Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 ' 09 6500 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING ' tgba -Pr oject #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB ' A St rtin installatio tit f t b fl diti t . g a n cons u es accep ance o - su oor con ons. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring ' under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. ' H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3 04 SHEET FLOORING . A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of ' seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1 /3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. B. Double cut sheet at seams. ' C. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer. 3.05 TI LE FLOORING A. Mix the from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when the is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay the flooring from center marks established with principle walls; adjust as required to avoid use of cut units less than one-half the wide at perimeters. 1. Match tiles for color and pattern by using in manufactured and packaged sequence. 2. Lay the in "checkerboard" pattern with grain reversed in adjacent tiles. ' 3. Press the firmly to adhesive and butt to adjacent tile. 4. Roll with 100-pound roller; remove excess adhesive. 5. When floor is completed, roll again. ' 3.06 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. ' B. C Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. Do not a l ll b fi t i h k h i h fl . pp y wa ase o n s ed wood veneer casewor at f nis t es ush to the floor. D. Apply wall base in toe space under all new casework. ' E. Mitered outside comers not acceptable. 3.07 CLEANING ' A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Allow flooring installation to set for at least five days before washing. D. Clean floor with a damp mop and mild detergent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Apply protective finish treatment in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions where recommended or required. ' 3.08 PROTECTION 20 October 2010 ' 09 6500 - 3 RESILIENT FLOORING tgba -Project #08062.02 A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. 3.09 PRODUCT DATA INFORMATION A. Rubber Wall Base Product Data Sheet 1. Base Finish Designation: RB 2. Style: Cove with topset toe (Style B). 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 4. Height: 4 inches except where otherwise indicated. 5. Inside Corners: Pre-molded or formed on job. 6. Outside Corners: Pre-molded, with minimum 2.5-inch returns. 7. Colors: See Section 01 9000. B. Sheet Vinyl Product Data Sheet 1. Floor Covering Designation: SV 2. Style & Color: See Section 01 9000. 3. Base: Resilient base or cove; see finish schedule for locations. 4. Seams: Heat welded per manufacturer's recommendation. C. Vinyl Transition Strips Product Data Sheet 1. Manufacturer: To be selected. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard range of colors. 3. Tile/Carpet Joiner: To be selected. 4. Carpet Reducer: To be selected. 5. Tile Reducer: To be selected. 6. Others: As selected from standard vinyl accessories. END OF SECTION Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 09 6500 - 4 RESILIENT FLOORING tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 09 6800 CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet, direct-glued. B. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 1000 -Material Color and Pattern Standards Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Section 03 3000 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied carpet. C. Section 03 5413 - Cementitions Floor Underlayment 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 2859 -Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2006. B. ASTM F 710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2008. C. CRI (CIS) -Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009. D. CRI 104 -Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet and cushion material specified. E. Submit two, 6 inch long samples of edge strip for each color specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Substrate Moisture: No condensation within 48 hours on underside of 4-foot square polyethylene sheet, fully taped at perimeter to substrate. B. Alkalinity and other conditions of concrete substrates shall comply with compatibility requirements of carpet and adhesive manufacturers. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver to project at least five percent overrun on calculated yardage. B. Provide required overrun exclusive of carpet needed for proper installation, waste and usable scraps. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 20 October 2010 09 6800 - 1 CARPETING tgba -Project #08062.02 A. Refer to Section 01 9000 B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Moldings and Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, clear alum color. B. Installation Adhesives: 1. Carpet: Water-resistant, non-staining, non-toxic, releasable type carpet adhesive recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt, non-toxic adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. D. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber, depth to suit carpet thickness with minimum 1-inch wide anchorage flange, manufacturer's standard colors as selected. E. Base: Base specified in Section 09 6500. F. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet. B. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for adhesive installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. D. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. E. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings: 1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent pieces. 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. F. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 09 6800 - 2 CARPETING tgba -Project #08062.02 3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately. B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean adhesive and cement from face of carpet promptly, using manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. C. Vacuum completed carpet installation. 1. Use commercial machine with face-beater element. 2. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed with new material. 3. Remove protruding face yarn with sharp scissors. 3.06 PROTECTION A. After installation and cleaning, cover entire carpet with polyethylene sheet or similar protective covering. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 09 6800 - 3 CARPETING ' tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB ' SECTION 09 9000 ' PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. ' C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: t 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. ' 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. ' 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS ' A. Section 01 9000 -Material Color and Pattern Standards 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS ' A. ASTM D 16 -Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide two samples 4 inches by 8 inches of each color and material ' to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate; define each separate coat, including primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture is achieved. ' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as ' the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: 1. Review sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for ' various substrates. 2. Notify Architect of problems anticipated using materials specified. C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality trade sale type paint material of various coating ' types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products ' named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 2. Federal Specifications establish minimum quality level for paint materials, except where other product identification is used. 3. Products that comply with performance requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ ' 20 October 2010 09 9000 - 1 PAINTING AND COATING tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB in composition, may be considered for use when acceptable to Architect. Furnish material data and ' manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, ' coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees , F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges ' required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of ' substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. ' D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for E. exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. , 1.08 EXTRA STOCK A. Furnish one properly labeled and sealed gallon for each type of finish coat of each color taken from ' batch mix furnished for work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. , B. Paints: 1. Benjamin Moore 8 Co 2. Rudda Paint ' 3. Sherwin Williams C. Refer to Section 01 9000 for color and finishes. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. ' 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS -GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be afield-catalyzed coating. , 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. t 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is ' specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. , 20 October 2010 ' 09 9000 - 2 PAINTING AND COATING I E s e s tgba -Project #08062.02 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements. Do not begin application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and items in place that are not to be painted, or provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting. 1. Remove items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. 2. Following completion of painting, reinstall items removed using workmen skilled in trades involved. C. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition. 1. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems when using specified finish coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry, cement plaster, and similar surfaces to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. a. Use abrasive blast cleaning if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper as required. a. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth, and dust off. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. c. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metal: Clean non-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated. a. Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances. b. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). c. Touch up shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged, and bare areas. Wire-brush, clean with solvents and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Shop-Coated Ferrous Metal: Surfaces shall be thoroughly degreased and cleaned using solvent (SSPC-SP 1). Remove any loose rust, blistered and peeling paint to bare metal by scraping, sanding, wire brushing, or other abrasion methods in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 or SP 3. Clean and spot prime field connections, welds, soldered joints, burned or abraded portions, rust areas, and bare metal with an approved type non-lifting metal primer. Feather edges of sound primer prior to spot priming. 6. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum based solvents so that surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock, by mechanical methods. 7. Aluminum Surfaces: a. Remove oil, grease, dirt, oxide, and other foreign material by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP 1. b. Neatly mask surfaces not to be coated before applying first coat of etching wash primer. c. Apply etching wash primer shortly before applying regular primer. Reapply wash primer when excessive time elapses between coatings. E. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain before using. 2. Use only thinners approved by manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. 20 October 2010 09 9000 - 3 PAINTING AND COATING tgba -Project #08062.02 3.02 PAINT APPLICATION Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, ~, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. Number of coats and film thickness required is same regardless of application method. Do not ' apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured. Sand between applications where required to produce a smooth, even surface. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, until paint film ' is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 5. Term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in items are in place. Extend coatings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. a. Paint backsides of access panels and removable ar hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. b. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise ' prepared for painting as soon as practicable, and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not re-coat until paint has dried. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of system as indicated or recommended by the manufacturer. D. Texture: Light stippled texture, minimum texture required to achieve a uniform finish. E. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat as recommended by manufacturer to material required to be painted or finished, and has not been prime coated by others. Re-coat primed and sealed substrates where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in the first coat to assure a finish coat with noburn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Brush Application: Brush-out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Draw neat ' glass lines and color breaks. G. Mechanical Applications: Use mechanical methods for paint application when permitted by manufacturer's recommendations, governing ordinances, and trade union regulations. ' 1. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. 2. Do not double-back with spray equipment, building-up film thickness of two coats in one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3,03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves right to engage services of independent testing laboratory to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 1. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests as required by Owner. 2. If tests show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting and remove non-complying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces, if, upon repainting with specified paint, two coatings are non-compatible. 3.04 CLEANING A. At end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from 20 October 2010 09 9000 - 4 PAINTING AND COATING tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing, scraping, or other proper methods using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. F. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. 8. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion. 3.06 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Drywall System (Walls and Ceilings) -Eggshell Finish: Three coats, with total dry film thickness not less than 5.0 mils. 1. Primer: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, B2$W200 (FS TT-P-650 Type 1). 2. First and Second Finish Coats: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Egg-Shell Enamel, B20W 200 Series. B. Gypsum Board: Water-based Epoxy System - 1. First Coat: Latex Wall Primer at 1.4 mils DFT. 2. Second Coat: Semi-Gloss Water-base Epoxy Coating at 1.5 mils DFT. 3. Third Coat: Semi-Gloss Water-base Epoxy Coating at 1.5 mils DFT C. Ferrous Metal -Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 5.0 mils. 1. Primer: S-W Universal Metal Primer, B50N6 (FS TT-P-664). Primer is not required on items delivered shop primed. 2. Undercoat: S-W ProMar 200 Enamel Undercoat, B49W200 (FS TT-E-545). 3. Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, 634W200 (FS TT-E-509). D. Zinc Coated Metal -Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 5.0 mils. 1. Primer: S-W Galvite Metal Primer, B50W3 (FS TT-P-641). 2. Undercoat: S-W ProMar 200 Enamel Undercoat, B49W200 (FS TT-E-545). 3. Finish Coat: S-W ProMar200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, 634W2r70 (FS TT-E-509). 3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Exterior Galvanized and Non-Ferrous Metals B. Exterior Archifecturaf Steel' 1. Finish: Gloss 2. Overall coating Mil Thickness: 6.0 dry mils in addition to the shop applied primer 3. Two Finish Coats: Hi-Build Aliphatic Polyurethane 665 Series / B60V2 4. (Dry mil thickness - 3.0 mils per coat) a. Note: Topcoat shall be applied within 90 days of application of shop primer. C. Exterior Soffit Board -Acrylic Latex 20 October 2010 09 9000 - 5 PAINTING AND COATING tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1. Two Finish Coats: A-100 Exterior Acrylic Latex 622 Series i 2. (Coverage rate - 350-400 sq. ft. per gallon each coat.) END OF SECTION 1 y L~ s s 20 October 2010 09 9000 - 6 PAINTING AND COATING tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Provide miscellaneous specialty fabricated and manufactured items of equipment or work as specified hereinafter and installed as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSIlICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ATBCB ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. D. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Davson (A. Davenport) B. Vista System C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Type: Acrylic Plexiglas, 1/8" thickness with integral permanent color lettering in contrasting color; matte finish. C. Lettering: Type image shall be fused under pressure of .005" depth; black. D. Letter Style: Helvetica medium, upper case. Face strokes shall not be less than 1/4" for largest letters. E. Braille: Provide Grade 2 Braille Text separated from the corresponding raised characters on all signs identifying rooms. 20 October 2010 10 1400 - 1 SIGNAGE tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB F. Signs required: 1. Toilets G. Mounting Location: Signs that identify rooms shall be mounted on the wall adjacent to the strike jamb of the door, centered at 60" above the floor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation shall have the same finish as the attached accessory. Exposed screw heads shall be non-removable type. Installed location and height of accessories shall be approximately as indicated on the drawings. Exposed surfaces shall be protected by strippable plastic or other means until the installation is accepted. The accessory manufacturer's mounting details shall be coordinated with other trades as the work progresses. All brackets, plates, anchoring devices and similar items used for mounting in wet areas shall be bedded in a silicone or other sealant as they are set to provide a watertight installation. B. Mount surface-mounted accessories on concealed backplates, except where shown otherwise. Accessory backplates shall have concealed fasteners. Install accessories except if indicated otherwise, with sheet metal screws or wood screws in Teflon or neoprene sleeves and expansion shields with toggle bolts, or other approved fasteners. C. Install on backplates in same manner. All accessories mounted on gypsum board walls without solid backing shall be fastened into metal backplates secured to studs. END OF SECTION i i 1 r i i 20 October 2010 10 1400 - 2 SIGNAGE tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 10 2601 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Section Includes: Rigid vinyl Sheet wall protection, wall guards and corner guards. B. Related Sections: 1. 09 2116 -Gypsum Board Systems: Substrate. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with 01 3300, unless specified otherwise. B. Samples: 1. Submit all samples in exact colors proposed for the work. 2. Submit Manufacturer's standard samples for all wall and corner guards, and 6" x 8" sample(s) of rigid sheet wall protection. 3. Submit sample of each trim piece proposed for the work. C. Submit product data and maintenance and cleaning instructions in accordance with Section 01730. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Lighting: Maintain a lighting level of 25 foot-candles per square foot at surfaces to receive components. B. Maintain maximum ventilation to remove volatile emissions produced during the installation process. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish additional two full length corner guards with top caps and continuous metal retainers for maintenance purposes. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. CIS Group, Tel. 800-233-8493 2. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Muskego, W1. Tel. 800-543-1729 3. Koroguard 6. Or Equivalent. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Comer Guards (CG): 1. Minimum Class I flame spread and smoke developed when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Ease exposed edges at SST comer guards. 3. See Section 01 9000. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Owner' Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 20 October 2010 10 2601 - 1 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level and in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations, unless indicated otherwise. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 10 2601 - 2 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB i~ PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 10 2800 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for toilet rooms and throughout clinic. B. Grab bars. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 -Submittals B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature and catalog cuts may be substituted for shop drawings, provided that they contain all required information and proposed items are clearly identified. t C. Shop Drawings: Show materials, equipment, connections and anchorages or fastenings to building construction; include details of fabrication and installation of items indicating relationship of, or attachment with adjoining building construction. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed are made by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., or as noted. r_~ t B. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories -General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Keys: Provide 4 keys for each accessory; master key all lockable accessories. C. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with GSA CID A-A-3002. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type,. 1. Product: B-6867 manufactured by Bobrick. B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, surface mounted. 1. Product: B-4262 manufactured by Bobrick. 2. Location: Typical sink throughout. C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, recessed, with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock. 1. Product: 8-4063 manufactured by Bobrick. D. Mirrors: 1. Channel-Frame Mirror a. Size: 24" x 36". 20 October 2010 10 2800 - 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 30 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet U.N.O. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 10 4400 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 L' 1 1 t f r r r r PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION 11 9010 EQUIPMENT A. Related Sections: For rough-ins and connections to building services for equipment, See Division 22, 23, and 26. B. Work by others: Certain items of equipment are to be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor. Such items are either existing in the facility or are to be purchased under separate contract and are designated on drawings by the abbreviation "FDIC", meaning "Furnished by Owner, but Installed by Contractor". In the case of newly purchased equipment, the items wilt be delivered to the job site loading dock or such other location as may be agreed upon between the Contractor and the Owner. In the case of presently installed and existing equipment, make arrangements with the Owner for their relocation and re-installation. The Contractor shall assume custody and responsibility for all equipment to be installed by him after inspecting same and determining that the items are complete and in an acceptable condition for installation. C. New equipment, Furnished and Installed by Contractor (FIC). Contractor to furnish and installation includes uncrating, setting in place, building-in, leveling, and attaching to building construction as required, making any mechanical and electrical connections required and leaving same in an operable condition satisfactory to the Architect at the time of acceptance of the work. D. New equipment, Furnished by Vendor, Installed by Contractor (FVIC). Installation includes uncrating, setting in place, building-in, leveling, and attaching to building construction as required, making any mechanical and electrical connections required and leaving same in an operable condition satisfactory to the Architect at the time of acceptance of the work. E. Existing equipment Furnished by Owner, Installed by Contractor (FDIC). Installation includes disconnection of equipment from present building services, transportation of the equipment from its present location to the new location indicated on drawings, setting in place, building-in, leveling and attaching to building construction, as required, making any mechanical and electrical connections required, and leaving same in an operable condition satisfactory to the Architect at the time of acceptance of the work. F. Owner-Furnished & Installed Equipment (FIO). Coordinate requirements with Owner and provide accurately located rough-ins, supports, and anchors in accordance with installation data furnished by Owner. G. Equipment Furnished and Installed by Vendor (FIV). Coordinate requirements with Vendor and provide accurately located rough-ins, supports, and anchors in accordance with the requirements of the Vendor. H. Coordination: Coordinate times and facilities required for the installation or re-installation with the Owner; disrupt no existing services without the prior approval of the Owner; perform all work at times and in manner convenient for the Owner allowing minimum disruption of the Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Equipment Schedule A. See Appendix 'A'. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 11 9010 - 1 EQUIPMENT tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 21 0000 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Work includes complete design, furnishing of all material, equipment and labor for installation of a ' wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system complete and ready for standard operation in the entire building. Design shall be based on a hydraulically balanced sprinkler system. B. Pay for and obtain all plan review and permit fees, deferred submittal fees, special inspections, and 1 connection fees as required to make system operational and to obtain Certificate of Occupancy. C. Provide a complete dry-pipe automatic sprinkler system for full coverage of all areas subject to freezing; elsewhere as shown. D. Provide the fire protection standpipe systems as required by local Fire Marshal and specified herein. E. Architectural sprinkler head layouts potentially in excess of code minimums. (No allowance will be made for Work not forseen by Contractor). F. Guarantees and Warranties: the Work shall be free from defects for a period of at least one year following date of acceptance by the Owner. Replace all parts proving defective during that time. G. Although such work is not specifically indicated, fumish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, switches and devices to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation in full compliance with all requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. H. Coordinate the Work under this Section with that of all other trades: check all drawings and specifications for possible conflicts between the several trades in equipment locations, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, supply and exhaust diffusers, fire sprinklers, structural and architectural features, etc. Should conflicts be found for any reason whatsoever, notify the Architect in writing. I. Examine the Site, verify existing conditions and review design documents. Be informed of all conditions under which work is to be done before submitting your proposal. J. Information shown relative to existing services is based upon available records and data during preparation of documents but shall be regarded as approximate only. K. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, switches and devices to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation in full compliance with all requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 22 0000 -Plumbing (Design/Build) B. Section 23 0000 - HVAC (Design/Build) 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Applicable Publications: Current publications of the issues listed below, referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by references thereto. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (Latest Editions): 20 October 2010 21 0000 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 1. NFPA 13 2. NFPA 14 3. NFPA 70 4. NFPA 72A 5. NFPA 72E Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems Standpipe and Hose Systems National Electrical Code Local Protective Signaling Systems, Current Edition Automatic Fire Detectors, Current Edition C. Department of Transportation Regulations D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Protection Equipment List, Current Edition with Quarterly Supplements. E. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM) F. List of Approved Equipment, Fire Protection Devices and Devices Involving Fire Hazard, Current Edition. G. Comply with requirements of local Fire Marshal. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract, B. Division 1 Specification Sections. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings and hydraulic calculations to show basis for the design by the sprinkler contractor and equipment. Partial submittals will not be acceptable. 2. The system shall be designed and installed so that no part thereof will interfere with ceiling heights, doors, windows, mechanical or electrical installations. Exact location of heads shall be carefully coordinated with other ceiling elements for a symmetrical pattem. Sprinkler heads shall not be located closer than 1' from lighting fixtures, diffusers, speakers, similar devices or obstructions. 3. Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades so as to avoid any interference with the potential effectiveness of the automatic sprinkler system. 4. Head spacing shall conform to NFPA 13 requirements for "light hazard" and "ordinary hazard" rules according to occupancy classification. D. Submit electrical requirements of all Work under this Section. E. Preliminary "reflected ceiling" plan layout of the sprinklered area of the building showing head locations in relation to lights, speakers, grilles, diffusers, etc., for review and the specific approval by the Architect. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise noted, this is a "performance" specification. B. Minimum qualifications of the Contractor/subcontractor shall include the following: 1. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in automatic fire protection /sprinkler systems, possessing a minimum of three years experience with systems similar in nature to the type specified herein. 2. Backflow Prevention: Installation and testing by a certified backflow assembly tester, in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. 3. Design Certification: Shop drawings shall be prepared by a person with a minimum certification of Level II Designer, supervised by a Licensed Professional Engineer or a Level III or IV Fire Sprinkler Designer, certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET), in Fire Protection Engineering Technology Automatic Fire Sprinkler System Layout. C. Sprinkler Head Location: The location of sprinkler heads is of critical importance in their relation to lights, diffusers, speakers, etc., and in furnishing a coordinated ceiling pattern of all ceiling elements. Contractor shall provide head locations in relation to lights, speakers, grilles, diffusers, exposed structural framing, etc., per preliminary "reflected ceiling" plan layout. As approved by the Architect. Additional heads, which may be required by the Architect for a coordinated ceiling pattem, shall be provided without added cost, even though the number of heads and related piping may exceed the Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 21 0000 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) i tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clin c Yelm MOB i f NFPA 13 stical tiles shall be centered in the tile e Heads in aco t r remen . . qu s o u D. Shop Drawings: Onty upon approval of head locations by the Architect, prepare and submit construction drawings to the local Fire Marshal and other local Authorities Having Jurisdiction for approval. Drawings bearing approval of the aforementioned code and/or review authorities shall then be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval PRIOR to the start of any work. E. Acceptable Materials and Equipment: Products with UL label or listing in the latest UL "Fire Protection List" and supplement, current at the end of the bidding period, or products with FM label or listing in the "Factory Mutual Approved Guide" are acceptable fire protection materials and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co. B. Start Sprinkler Corp. C. Automatic Sprinkler Co. D. Viking 1 E. Grinnell F. Substitutions: see Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements ' 2.02 WATER SERVICE FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Service Work: Outside fire service main is not part of Division 23 Mechanical work. Provide building fire service main from building exterior outward to a point approximately 5' from building wall and make connection to Fire Main. B. Pipe and Fittings: Mechanical joint type, Pacific States Cast Iron Pipe, U.S. Pipe and Foundry, American Cast Iron Company, or approved; plain tip gaskets. Pipe, 250-psi wp ductile iron, cement lined, Class 52 to ANSI A11.51 (AWWA C-155). Fittings, 250-psi wp for gray iron, 350-psi wp for ductile iron, conforming to ANSI A21.10 or Federal Specification WW-P-421c, cement lined and seal coated same as piping. C. Joints: Mechanical joints, dimensions, metal thickness and standard mechanical joint gaskets shall conform io ANSI A21.11. D. Depth of Cover: 3' unless otherwise indicated. 2 03 BUILDING SPRINKLER SYSTEM MATERIALS . A. Water Piping: Piping shall comply with materials listed in NFPA 13. Pipe and tube used in sprinkler systems shall be designed to withstand a working pressure of not less than 175 psi. B. Couplings (all sizes): Class 150 (300-psi WOG) malleable iron. C. Unions 2"and smaller: Class 150 (300-psi WOG) female-screwed malleable iron with ground joint and brass-to-iron seat. D. Flanges 2-1/2" and up: Cast iron pipe flanges, 175-psi WOG minimum, ANSI 616.1. Gaskets, ferrous or nickel-based, Grinnell, Garlock, Flexitallic, or approved manufacturer. E. Fittings: Cast iron screwed, 175-psi minimum, ASTM A126, Class B and ANSI 616.4. Cast iron flanged, F 175-psi WOG minimum, ANSI 616.1. . Grooved Couplings and Fittings (All Sizes): 750-psi WOG minimum, segmental bolted couplings, malleable iron -ASTM A47. 1 G. Pipe Thread Compounds: Tetrafluoroethylene dispersions and other suitable compounds may be used 20 October 2010 21 0000 - 3 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB upon approval. Tetrafluoroethylene tape is not acceptable. H. Escutcheons: Fastened securely to pipe, chromium-plated iron or chromium-plated brass, one-piece or split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew; Beaton 8~ Cadwell Series 10, Keene No. 102 or No. 105, or approved. I. Pipe Hangers: Hangers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, and in accordance with requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in sprinkler systems. J. Valves: 1. Wet-pipe Alarm Check Valves: UL-listed or FM-approved, complete with standard accessories and trim necessary to give an alarm, pressure gauges, retard chamber, testing provisions, and all necessary inter-component piping, fittings, and valves; clapper, with elastomer seat. 2. Valves: Gate, globe and check valves (all sizes) shall be UL-listed or FM-approved. Gate valves, OS 8~ Y type, 175-Ib. Wp, double-disc, Kennedy No. 68 or approved, resilient seat. Check valves, wafer check design, cast-iron body, 175-Ib wp, ball drip connection, bronze trim, flange-mounted, Mueller. K. Switches: 1. Supervisory Switches: Provide at each OS&Y valve including all OS8~Y valves at backflow preventers at each rising-stem globe valve, UL-listed and compatible with the valve. Valve yokes shall be drilled for attachment screws for all switches. 2. Water Flow Switches: Viking C-1, Potter VSR-F, or approved vane-type flow switches, UL-listed, with circuits and contacts selected to handle all switching required by the fire alarm system. Water flow switches shall have sensitivity adjustment to prevent false alarming caused by water surge or slight pressure fluctuation. Time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds; requiring special wrench for cover removal to prevent unauthorized access. Provide tamper switch to signal in the building engineer's office if cover of water-flow switch adjustment-device is removed. 3. Pressure Switches: UL-listed, 300-psi pressure rating, 2-psi to 15-psi adjustable range, factory set at 4 to 8 psi on rise in pressure, rated at 120-volt ac, 15 ampere. L. Alarm Devices: 1. Water Flow Alarm Device: Water motor gong, UL-listed, FM-approved assembly, gong with approved hood, non staining weather-resistant mounting; aluminum gong; water motor tetrafluoroethylene shaft bearings, inlet strainer, waste water to drain. M. Fire Department Connection: Flush plate, 2-1/2" inlets, horizontal pattern, Potter-Roemer 5100 Series two-wayback, angle or end outlet, size and configuration to suit installation requirements, brass body, polished chrome-plated plate lettered "AUTO SPKR". Plugs and chains shall be polished chrome-plated. Threads shall conform to the local Fire Department Standards. N. Miscellaneous Connections and Fittings: As required by NFPA 13, drains, inspector's tests, discharge outlets, and flushing connections; sway bracing; flexible joints which shall consist of grooved-end pipe and fittings, Victaulic, Gustin-Bacon, or ITT Grinnel manufacturer. Couplings for grooved-end pipe, UL-listed, Victaulic Style 07 "Zero-Flex" rigid coupling with standard gaskets. 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Backflow preventer shall be the double-check-valve type. Assembly shall have two spring-loaded, independently operating, poppet-type check valves mounted in a common body, two gate valves and four test cocks, designed for installation in horizontal flow pattem. Body shall be hot-dip galvanized cast iron with bronze and stainless steel working parts, 175-psi maximum wp, 33-180°F temperature range. Backflow preventer shall be UL-listed and conform to local water purveyor requirements, AW WA and LISC Cross Connection Control Laboratory, Hersey Products, Inc. No. 2 Double Check Valve Assembly, or approved manufacturer. 2.05 SPRINKLER HEADS 20 October 2010 21 0000 - 4 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. General: Standard sprinkler heads with '/z" orifice shall be used. Sprinkler head temperature ratings shall comply with NFPA 13. B. Heads in Finished Areas with Ceilings: 1. Quick Response Recessed type sprinkler head with glass bulb. Heads shall be UL listed standard head with '/z" orifice. Sprinkler heads shall be Star Sprinkler Corporation Model QR-Q, or approved Reliable or Automatic Sprinkler. C. Heads in Exposed Areas Without Ceilings: 1. Quick response upright or pendent type sprinkler head, with '/Z" orifice, glass bulb, chrome plated. Sprinkler heads shall be Star Sprinkler Corporation Model SG, or approved Reliable or Automatic Sprinkler. 2. Quick Response sidewall Sprinklers: Provide in areas without suspended ceilings where piping must be installed close to walls or structural members. Provide a vertical sidewall sprinkler for installation vertically above the piping; horizontal sidewall sprinkler for horizontal installation on the side of the piping; standard factory bronze finish in unfinished areas; chrome plated finish in finished areas. Sprinklers shall be'/z" orifice, glass bulb type, Star Sprinkler Corporation Model SG (QR), or approved Reliable or Automatic Sprinkler. D. Spares: Spares for each temperature rating of sprinkler head, complete with appropriate storage cabinet and four wrenches, shall be provided. The total number of spare heads shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13. E. Wire Guards: For all heads with clearance height less than 7'6", factory-fabricated clamp-on guards. 2.06 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. General: Areas subject to freezing shall be served by a dry pipe sprinkler system, designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Dry Pipe Alarm Valve: Provide the dry pipe alarm control valve to separate system water supply from the air-filled system piping. Valve shall be type designed on a differential pressure area principle using air pressure against supply water pressure. Dry pipe valve assembly shall include accelerator, pressure maintenance device, air compressor, and all trim and accessories for operable dry-system fire protection system. C. Air Compressor: Motor-driven unit with V-belt drive, self-oiling-type compressor equipped with suction strainer, muffler, high and low-level oil filling gauge, automatic start and stop control. Unit shall provide air supply capable of filling the system to 45 psi in 15 minutes. D. Low Air Pressure Alarm: Provide low air pressure alarm, distinctive from the fire alarm, with special switch to control trouble alarm. E. Pressure Switch: Pressure switch to activate water flow alarm shall be UL-listed and FM-approved, 2 to 15 psi range, Grunau No. 1259-1, or approved listed alarm pressure switch for sprinkler systems. 2.07 STANDPIPES -COMBINATION-TYPE SYSTEM A. General: Provide the combination standpipe systems. Standpipe outlets shall be 2-1/2" hose outlets in stairways, for use by fire department. All standpipes are water-filled at all times, except short sections of piping inside of outlets and connections on outside walls. All standpipes shall be in accordance with NFPA 14 standards. Standpipes also serve automatic sprinklers. Products and installation as specified for building sprinkler systems and in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, steel. Fittings, screwed joint malleable iron, or UL-approved malleable iron 1 groove-end fittings. Couplings may be galvanized threaded couplings or maybe UL-approved couplings of Victaulic, Gustin-Bacon, or Grinnell manufacture. All pipe fittings and couplings to be 175-psi minimum working pressure. 150 Ib. malleable iron fittings may be used when they are rated 175-psi working pressure with cold water. 20 October 2010 21 0000 - 5 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB C. Support of Vertical Riser Piping: Bolted riser clamps consisting of 1-1/2" x 5/16" steel bars forged to fit pipe, bolted with 'h" bolts; bracketed to anchor bolts in wall or resting on each floor slab through which pipe passes. D. Hose Outlet Valves: Angle globe, UL-approved, 2-112" hose thread male outlet; Potter-Roemer No. 4065, or approved; cast brass, with bronze cap for use with spanner wrench and with chain; local fire department threads; 300-psi wp; red iron hand wheel. E. Hose Outlets Above Roof (Through-Wall Supply Pipes): Two 2-1/2" angle globe valves, caps and chains as specified above, with two-way 2-1/2" cast brass standpipe roof outlet connection with circular escutcheon inscribed "Standpipe," Potter-Roemer No. 5872. Provide NRS gate valve in piping below outlet, with through-the-wall extension stem and cast brass valve control with circular escutcheon, inscribed "Valve control"; Potter-Roemer No. 5850. All exposed parts shall be bronze finish. Provide'/, ball drip for draining. F. Fire Department Connection: Flush plate, 2-1/2" inlets, horizontal pattern, Potter-Roemer 5100 Series two-way, back, angle or end outlet, size and configuration to suit installation requirements, ductile iron or brass body, polished chrome-plated plate lettered "AUTO SPKR". STANDPIPE." Plugs and chains shall be polished chrome-plated. Threads shall comply with local jurisdictional Fire Department Standard PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, WATER SERVICE WORK A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 2 and all applicable requirements of NFPA 24 and AWWA. B. Pipe Installation: The sprinkler system supply line shall be laid below the frostline, depths of cover in accordance with NFPA 24. Where connection of the sprinkler supply line to the water supply main cannot be made immediately, the sprinkler supply line shall be extended to 5' outside of the building and capped. Change in direction of pipe shall be made with suitable standard fittings. C. Tie Rods: Tie rods shall be provided the full extent of the sprinkler system supply line from the water meter pit to the building, anchored to the building wall, and also anchored at the water meter pit; installation I n accordance with NFPA 24. Paint all tie rods with two coats of asphaltic paint before backfilling. Restrainers at joints are not acceptable in place of tie rods. Support of Piping Outside Building Wall: For support of piping placed on backfilled earth outside building walls, provide reinforced concrete beam 18" x 6" cross section size under the pipe, to resist settlement. Beam shall rest on concrete corbels cast in the wall, or on hot-dip galvanized steel channel shelf of 12 x 3 x 25 Ib./ft. channels attached to wall by four 1"size, hot-dip galvanized steel through-bolts. Beams shall extend 3' onto undisturbed earth on the farthest side of the excavation for the building wall construction, away from the building. Provide cement grout support under pipe, on beam for its full length. E. Flushing: Before connecting sprinkler system to underground supply connections, each supply connection shall be thoroughly flushed out in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Installation of system materials and equipment shall conform to applicable requirements of: 1. NFPA No. 13 "Installation of Sprinkler Systems" 2. The provisions and recommendations of the NFPA constitute mandatory minimum requirements for work specified herein. Strict compliance therewith is required, except all more stringent requirements of the Contract Documents shall modify, supplement and supersede applicable provisions and recommendations of the NFPA. B. Certification: Provide certificates covering installation and tests for signature by the Architect prior to acceptance of work. 20 October 2010 21 0000 - 6 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB C. Experienced Workmen: Fire protection system work shall be supervised and performed by personnel regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems conforming to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and NFPA standards and closely similar to the work specified and indicated. Submit evidence of qualification of any proposed supervisor or installer. The Architect may reject those who cannot show evidence of such qualifications. D. Welding: Welding will not be permitted except upon specific approval by the State Fire Marshal. When authorization is obtained, welding shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA 51 B and in accordance with the Code for Pressure Piping ANSI 831.1.0 Power Piping Section with Addenda B31.1.Oa. Sample weld and credentials of qualified welders shall be submitted for approval. E. Piping Supports: Vertical-piping supports shall be provided at each floor for risers. F. Earthquake Bracing and Earthquake Joints: Comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. requirements and applicable requirements of NFPA 13. G. Piping: All pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories shall be clean and free of all deleterious material before being installed in their respective systems. Pipe shall be cleaned by hammer, shaking, swabbing and flushing, or by a combination of methods. All lines shall be blown out with compressed air after erection, but blowing out shall not be relied upon for removing foreign matter. During the progress of construction, open ends of pipe, fittings and valves shall be properly protected at all times to prevent the admission of foreign matte. Provide flushing connections at ends of sprinkler cross-mains in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13. 1. Drains: The sprinkler system shall be provided with complete drainage facilities as indicated an in accordance with NFPA 23. Protection Against Freezing: Supply pipes or risers that pass through unheated spaces in or under building areas exposed to freezing shall be protected from freezing in accordance with applicable methods in NFPA 13. 3.03 CLEANING A. Cleaning operations during construction and upon completion of the work of this Contract shall be performed in accordance with the applicable requirements of the referenced NFPA standards and the Contract Documents. 3.04 HEAD PROTECTION A. Heads shall be protected during painting operations with paper or plastic bags secured overheads as part of the work under this Section. Protection shall be removed immediately upon the finishing of painting operations. 3.05 FIRE PROTECTION WATER SYSTEMS TESTING A. Prior to acceptance of the work, test all completed systems in the presence of the local fire department and Fire Marshal. Testing and acceptance of sprinkler system shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. 3.06 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical components provided, as part of the work under this Section shall be connected as part of the work under Division 26. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 21 0000 - 7 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (DESIGN/BUILD) 1 t i 1 1 1 CI ~~ n 1 1 1 tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB 1 1 1 u u 1 1 SECTION 22 0000 PART1 GENERAL 1,01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PLUMBING (DESIGNIBUII„D) A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all design and permit drawings, labor, tools, equipment, appliances, materials, and services necessary for and properly incidental to the furnishing and installing of all plumbing work and related items as shown and specified herein. 1. A portion of the project contains an Ambulatory Surgery Center. System to be designed and constructed as required to obtain Washington State Department of Health (DOH) license and Medicare Certification. B. The Work to be performed under this Section shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Drainage waste and vent system completed, including connection to sewer outside the building. 2. Hot water system including water heaters. 3. Cold water system. 4. Natural gas system. 5. Medical Gas Systems. 6. Rough in for equipment furnished and installed by the Owner where specifically mentioned or shown. 7. Connection to equipment furnished and installed by the Owner where specifically mentioned or shown. 8. Excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work under this Section, flashing of all pipes where they pierce the roof or other waterproof membranes and all required cutting and patching necessary to complete the work. 9. Work includes complete design and permit drawings, furnishing of all material, equipment and labor for installation of plumbing, and ready for standard operation in the entire building. 10. Pay for and obtain all plan review and permit fees, deferred submittal fees, special inspections, and connection fees as required to make system operational and to obtain Certificate of Occupancy. i 1. Guarantees and Warranties: the Work shall be free from defects for a period of at least one year following date of acceptance by the Owner. Replace all parts proving defective during that time. 12. Coordinate the Work under this Section with that of all other trades: check all drawings and specifications for possible conflicts between the several trades in equipment locations, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, supply and exhaust diffusers, fire sprinklers, structural and architectural features, etc. Should conflicts be found for any reason whatsoever, notify the Architect in writing. 13. Examine the Site, verify existing conditions and review design documents. Be informed of all conditions under which work is to be done before submitting your proposal. 14. Information shown relative to existing services is based upon available records and data during preparation of documents but shall be regarded as approximate only. 15. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, switches and devices to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation in full compliance with all requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 21 0000 -Fire Protection Piping (Design/Build) 20 October 2010 22 0000 - 1 PLUMBING (DESIGN/BUILD) P b a - tg roject #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB B. Section 23 0000 - HVAC (Design/Build) i 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest applicable State, County and local regulations and ordinances. Nothing in these specifications or drawings is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Any extra work or materials needed to comply with these laws or rules and regulations shall be furnished whether or not specifically shown or specified. B. UPC. C. NFPA 101, Chapter 7. d. NFPA 99 -Health Care Facilities E. 2006 AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital & Health Care Facilities. 1. Washington State Amendments, dated 07/21/2008. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according Section 01 3300. , B. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and C. Division 1 Specification Sections. Review of submittals are for purposes of evaluating general design compliance only. The Design/Build Engineer is the engineer of record. D. Design Drawings. Provide drawings sufficient to obtain jurisdiction approval. Confirm what jurisdictions require documents for review including DOH and local jurisdictions. E. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings, to show basis for the design by the Plumbing Contractor and equipment. Partial submittals will not be acceptable. 2. The system shall be designed and installed so that no part thereof will interfere with ceiling heights, doors, windows, mechanical or electrical installations. F. Equipment information: 1. Prior to the ordering of any materials and equipment and within fifteen (15) days of contract award, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval six (6) copies of manufacturer's brochures containing complete dimensional and performance characteristics, wiring diagrams, installation and operation instructions, etc., for the following equipment. a. Plumbing Fixtures. b. Plumbing specialties. c. Drainage specialties. d. Water heaters. e. Medical Gas Devices. 2. In addition to the above specific items, a materials list shall be submitted listing each specification paragraph number, and stating whether the materials proposed are as specified or if they have been approved as substitutions. 3. If the item is as specified, it is sufficient to note "as specified" opposite the paragraph number. The submittal shall be complete for the first submission. The submittals are not to be sent through in piecemeal fashion. 4. If the item is a substitution, it must have been approved at the time of submitting the bid, otherwise substitutions will only be considered by formal request. A complete submittal as described in paragraph A above shall be provided for all substituted equal items. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise noted, this is a "design-performance" specification. B. Acceptable Materials and Equipment: Products with UL label or listing in the latest UL "Fire Protection 20 October 2010 22 0000 - 2 PLUMBING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB List" and supplement, current at the end of the bidding period, or products with FM label or listing in the "Factory Mutual Approved Guide" are acceptable fire protection materials and equipment. C. Use sufficient number of journeyman plumbers and competent supervisors in the execution of this portion of the work to ensure proper and adequate plumbing installation throughout. to the acceptance or rejection of installed plumbing, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Drainage, waste and vent (DWV) piping: Except for fixture connections, all pipe and fittings shall be standard weight cast iron pipe, unless otherwise noted. All underground and outside plenums to be ABS/PVC, unless otherwise noted. B. Domestic water piping: All hot and cold water piping, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, shall be hard-drawn copper tube, Type "L". Below grade and below-slab piping shall be Type "L" copper tube with brazed joints. C. Gas piping: All gas piping below grade shall be plastic coated, black steel pipe (Schedule 40), with welded fittings and joints. All gas piping 3 inches and smaller shall be black steel pipe, threaded, with malleable iron fittings. Piping exposed to weather shall be galvanized. Piping below concrete slabs to run within vented sleeves. Piping below grade must be wrapped. 2.02 BURIED PIPE WRAPPING A. Buried piping: Wrap all uninsulated, buried, steel and copper piping and fittings as follows. 1. Thoroughly clean piping and fittings of loose scale, rust, dirt, oil and grease before wrapping. Wire brush as required; use solvent for removal of oil and grease- ' 2. Coat with Johns-Manville No. 22 primer adhesive. 3. Wrap with Johns-Manville VID - 20 mil. Thick, ply vinyl tape. Stretch tape tight during application. Overlap tape to result in double thickness. ~ 2.03 VALVES A. Walworth, Nibco, Kennedy, Jenkin and Stockham. The following models are Walworth Type Size Range Part Number PSI / WOG 1. Gate 1 /2" to 314" 2 125 2. Gate 1 " to 3" 4 125 3. Globe 3" and smaller 590 150 4. Check 3" and smaller 510 150 5. Gas Cock 1"and smaller 557 125 6. Gas Cock 1-1/2" and larger 554 125 with wrench 2.04 VALVE BOXES A. All valve boxes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, shall be Concrete Products, Inc." or "Forny". Traffic type of depth, lock type cast iron cover labeled "WATER" or "GAS". 2.05 VENT FLASHING A. Vent flashing at each vent through the roof shall be per roofing manufacturer's recommendation. 2.06 CLEANOUTS A. Smith, Zurn, Josam, Wade, Rototech, Enpocco, or Ancon. B. Cleanouts shall be Zurn models as shown on the drawings. Do not use PVC cleanouts. 2.07 FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS AND ROOF DRAINS 20 October 2010 22 0000 - 3 PLUMBING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 A. Ancon, Smith, Zurn, Josam or Wade. 2.08 WATER HEATERS -ELECTRIC Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Model, size and capacity sized for number of fixtures and proposed use: UL listed. B. Glass lined and fiberglass insulated storage tank, automatic thermostat, automatic cut-off for over-temperature or thermostat failure, drain cock, and ASME stamped pressure and temperature lever type relief valve, and magnesium anode rod. C. Provide a one year warranty. 2.09 CIRCULATION PUMPS A. Provide circulatling pumps for the domestic hot water system. Pumps shall be of the "in-line" type. The pump shall have a bronze body with a brass impeller. 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. As scheduled on the drawings. B. General: Provide complete fixture assembly, including all trim and appurtenance for proper operation and neat, finished appearance. Procure all rough-in data from the Manufacturer, and rough in and connect to fixtures, as required. 1. Vitreous chinaware fixtures shall be white, and unless otherwise noted, vitreous china. Enamelware shall be of steel with acid-resistant enamel. Include china bold caps. 2. Factory grind backs and bases of fixtures smooth. Point up at joints with walls and floors with non-hardening silicone. C. Submissions: Include brochure, complete with description of all fixtures and trim. D. Trim: 1. Exposed trim, including stops, tubing, traps, waste pieces and escutcheons shall be polished chrome-plated. 2. Provide separate control stops for each fixture. 3. Gasket floor outlet fixtures. 4. Provide'/." steel backing plates for fixture support where required. E. Mounting heights: 1. Manufacturer's standard heights unless indicated otherwise. 2. Handicapped fixtures mounted per local Building Code Regulations PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to wall work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may commence. Verify that the completed plumbing installation will be in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations and with the original design. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect and proceed as directed. 3.02 PLUMBING SYSTEM LAYOUT A. Lay out the plumbing system in careful coordination with the Drawings, determining proper elevations for all components of the system and using only the minimum number of bends to produce a satisfactorily functioning system. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings in a-I cases except where other work may interfere. Lay out all pipes to fall within partition, ceiling, or roof cavities so as not require furring other than that shown on the drawings. 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Dig trenches straight and true to line and grade, with bottom of trench free from rock points and with 20 October 2010 22 0000 - 4 PLUMBING (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB pipe cushion consisting of undisturbed natural soil on a compacted bed of fine sand of a minimum 4" in depth. 3.04 CONCRETE WORK A. Unless specifically indicated on the drawings to be furnished by others, furnish and install concrete work such as pads, bases, kick blocks, and the like, where shown. Concrete and reinforcing steel stall be equal to that specified for general construction. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Install all piping promptly capping or plugging all open ends. B. Install all piping generally level and plumb, free from traps, and in a manner to conserve space for other work. C. Cushion all traps and bearing to minimize transfer of sound. Firmly anchor all pipes in position. Provide complete isolation of dissimilar metals. D. Provide uniform pitch of at least'/," per foot for all horizontal waste and soil piping within the building. E. Conceal all piping unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. F. All equipment shall be fitted with shutoff valves with connection unions or flanges between equipment and valve. G. Flexible connections in pipeline connection equipment shall be installed in a horizontal position. 3.06 STERILIZATION OF PIPES A. After preliminary purging of the system, chlorinate the entire potable water system in accordance with American Water Works Association and with local plumbing code procedures for flushing and disinfecting water mains, and in accordance with all other pertinent codes and regulations. 3.07 SERVICE UTILITY DIAGRAM (As Built Drawings) A. Furnish a print showing an accurate record of the plumbing underground installation. Locate all lines, valves, depths of lines, slopes of lines and other pertinent data such as meters and cleanouts serving the building and site. 3.08 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion of all work of this Section, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the plumbing installation removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign matter. Use only the type of cleaner recommended by the Manufacturer. B. Remove all debris and flush the device. System to be free of debris. C. Prior to project opening, provide thorough training for the Building Manager in all aspects of maintenance and operation of the plumbing systems. 3.09 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to drawings. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 22 0000 - 5 PLUMBING (DESIGN/BUILD) 1 1 1 1 1 tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 23 0000 HVAC (DESIGNlBUILD) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Work includes complete design and permit drawings and specifications, furnishing of all material, equipment and labor for installation of heating, ventilation system and related items complete and ready for standard operation in the entire building. Design shall be based on the Washington State Energy Code. 1. A portion of the project contains an Ambulatory Surgery Center. System to be designed and constructed as required to obtain Washington State Department of Health (DOH) license and Medicare Certification. B. Provide complete performance based energy code calculations as required to obtain a building permit from the local governing jurisdiction. Coordinate with the Architect to obtain information on building envelope components including glazing types and amounts, roof and wall insulation, slab edge conditions, etc. C. Pay for and obtain all plan review and permit fees, deferred submittal fees, special inspections, and connection fees as required to make system operational and to obtain Certificate of Occupancy. D. Work performed under this section shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Complete heating, ventilation, air conditioning and cooling systems, including coordination of design using new or existing building shell equipment. 2. Automatic temperature control systems.(DDC) 3. Air intakes, reliefs, exhaust and transfer fans. 4. Flues, vents and connections, including water heaters. 5. Acoustical Boots at return air grilles in plenum-return areas. E. Guarantees and Warranties: the Work shall be free from defects for a period of at least one year following date of acceptance by the Owner. Replace all parts proving defective during that time. F. Coordinate the Work under this Section with that of all other trades: check all drawings and specifications for possible conflicts between the several trades in equipment locations, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, supply and exhaust diffusers, fire sprinklers, structural and architectural features, etc. Should conflicts be found for any reason whatsoever, notify the Architect in writing. G. Examine the Site, verify existing conditions and review design documents. Be informed of all conditions under which work is to be done before submitting your proposal. H. Information shown relative to existing services is based upon available records and data during preparation of documents but shall be regarded as approximate only. I. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, switches and devices to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation in full compliance with all requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 21 0000 -Fire Protection Piping (Design/Build) B. Section 22 0000 -Plumbing (Design/Build) 20 October 2010 23 0000 - 1 HVAC (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Applicable Publications: Current publications of the issues listed below, referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification. B. Reference Standards (Latest Editions): 1. ASHRAE 2. NFPA 101 - 2000 Edition a. Chapter 7 -Building Service and Fire Protection Equipment b. Chapter 18 -New Health Care Occupancies c. Chapter 20 -New Ambulatory Health Care Occupancies d. Chapter 38 -New Business Occupancies 3. NFPA 99 -Health Care Facilities 4. NFPA 70 -Material Electric Code 5. NFPA 90A - "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems." 6. AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital and Health Care Facilities. 7. "Duct Manual and Sheet Construction for Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems" by SMACHA 8. National Board of Fire Underwriters. 9. 2006 AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital & Health Care Facilities. a. Washington State Amendments, dated 07/21/2008. C. Qualifications of Installers for the actual fabrication, installation, and testing of work under this Section: 1. Use only thoroughly trained and experienced workers completely familiar with the items required and with the manufacturer's recommendations as to their use. In the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workers. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise noted, this is a "performance" specification. B. Acceptable Materials and Equipment: Products with UL label or listing in the latest UL "Fire Protection List" and supplement, current at the end of the bidding period, or products with FM label or listing in the "Factory Mutual Approved Guide" are acceptable fire protection materials and equipment. C. Minimum qualifications of the Contractor/subcontractor shall include the following: 1. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in heating and ventilation systems, possessing a minimum of five years experience with systems similar in nature to the type specified herein. D. Commissioning: 1. Provide Commissioning per Washington State Energy Code. 2. Commissioning Agent subject to Owner's approval. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and B. Division 1 Specification Sections. Review of submittals are for purposes of evaluating general design compliance only. The Design/Build Engineer is the engineer of record. C. Submit as required by Section 01 3300. D. Washington State Energy Code calculations as required to obtain building permit. E. Design Drawings. Provide drawings sufficient to obtain jurisdiction approval. Confirm what jurisdictions require documents for review including DOH and local jurisdictions. F. Submit Shop Drawings. 1. Product literature and specifications of all equipment and materials. 2. Complete duct layout showing all duct work, diffusing equipment, fans/air handlers, etc. 3. Submit electrical requirements for all Work under this section. Providence Timeshare Clinic , Yelm MOB 20 October 2010 23 0000 - 2 HVAC (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES A. Allow for periodic meetings with Owner, Building Management and Architect to review design and to quantify value analysis options. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 23 0000 - 3 HVAC (DESIGN/BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL (DESIGN /BUILD) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB A. Provide complete design and construction of electrical systems as described herein and as required to provide a complete and functional electrical system as required by local, State and Federal Jurisdictions. 1. A portion of the project contains an Ambulatory Surgery Center. System to be designed and constructed as required to obtain Washington State Department of Health (DOH) license and Medicare Certification. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 DRAWINGS A. Provide electrical design and permit drawings to provide needed power and lighting. Provide power and lighting for all equipment and fixtures shown and/or customary indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Fire Sprinkler Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. Any discrepancies in the plans and specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. B. Notify Architect of deviations from Drawings needed to make electrical work conform to the building as constructed, and to related work of other Divisions. C. Power and Voice/Data outlets. Any outlets shown on floor plan layouts are required for specific uses within the project and do not necessarily show all outlets required for the project. Provide additional outlets as required by Code, equipment and the standard of care for similar facilities. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED A. Pay for and obtain all plan review and permit fees, deferred submittal fees, special inspections, and connection fees as required to make system operational and to obtain Certificate Of Occupancy. Coordinate with serving utility company. B. Include all design, permit drawings, labor, material, equipment, transportation and services to furnish and install complete electrical system including: 1. New underground electrical secondary service from main distribution panel to point of connection with utility company facilities. 2. Main distribution equipment with metering equipment and overcurrent protective devices. 3. Complete system of feeders in conduit to power panels and branch-circuit panels. 4. Furnish and install branch-circuit panels for power and lighting. 5. Complete branch-circuit wiring system for motors, receptacles, junction boxes, lighting, etc. 6. Furnish and install all wall switches, receptacles, etc., as required by code, equipment layout and the standard of care for similar facilities. 7. Furnish and install complete lighting fixtures. 8. Furnish and install wiring up to and including safety switches for heating and ventilating equipment provided by mechanical. 9. Final electrical connection to hot water tanks. 10. Fire alarm system as required by local and State Jurisdictions. 11. Minor relocations (within 10-ft. radius of position shown on drawings) ordered prior to rough-in installation shall be made without added cost to the Owner. 20 October 2010 26 0000 - 1 ELECTRICAL (DESIGN /BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest editions of references fisted herein and of applicable State, County and local regulations and ordinances. Nothing in these specifications or drawings is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Any extra work or materials needed to comply with these laws or rules and regulations shall be furnished whether or not specifically shown or specified. B. NFPA 101 1. Chapter 7 -Building Services and Fire Protection Equipment 2. Chapter 12 -New Healthcare Occupancies 3. Chapter 26 -New Business Occupancies C. NFPA 99 -Health Care Facilities. Essential Electrical Systems to Meet the Requirements of a Type I System. D. NFPA 70 -National Electric Code. E. 2006 AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital & Health Care Facilities. 1. Washington State Amendments, dated 07/21/2008. F. NFPA 76A for Emergency Power Systems. G. NFPA 110. H. Washington State Energy Code. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or Electrical Testing Laboratories for Materials and Equipment. 1.06 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS A. The following items will be furnished and installed under another Division of the Work. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items. 1. Mechanical equipment to be furnished and mounted under another Division, but electrically connected under this Division. 1.07 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items, if installed, will be furnished and installed under separate contract. Work under this contract shall be performed in a manner to allow for the installation of such equipment or items. 1. Items of furnishings, portable equipment, etc. 2. Telephone/Intercom/aging System instruments and equipment. 3. Data communications cabling and connections. 4. Nurse Call Systems. 5. Security monitoring system extensions. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise noted, this is a "performance" specification. B. Acceptable Materials and Equipment: Products with UL label or listing in the latest UL "Fire Protection List" and supplement, current at the end of the bidding period, or products with FM label or listing in the "Factory Mutual Approved Guide" are acceptable fire protection materials and equipment. 1.09 SUBMITTALS OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA 8 SAMPLES A. Submit per requirements of 01 3300 Submittals. 1.10 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS ' A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. 20 October 2010 26 0000 - 2 ELECTRICAL (DESIGN /BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic Yelm MOB B. Refer to Section 01 6000 -Products and Substitutions 1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7000 Contract Close-Out. 1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7823 Operations and Maintenance Data. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7836 Warranties and Bonds. B. In addition to the one year warranty specified in Contract Conditions, warrant Work listed below as follows: 1. BALLASTS shall have extended warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICES A. All wiring devices shall be one-click termination. B. Manufacturer: Pass & Seymour PlugTail Wiring Devices 1. www.passandseymour.com/plugtail 2. no substitutions accepted 2.02 RACEWAYS A. All power distribution conductors shall be in rigid conduit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COMPLETION AND TESTING A. Complete each electrical system and place in operation. B. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operating condition free of faults, shorts, or unintentional grounds. C. Demonstrate each system in the presence of the Architect, Electrical Engineer or Owner's Representative when requested. 3.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Work Included: labor and material required for the external electrical wiring and 120 volt control wiring for mechanical equipment. B. Work Included: mechanical control wiring rated less than 120 volts, such as to low voltage control components. 3.03 OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT A. Install and connect electrical equipment. B. Reference Section 11 9010 Owner-Furnish Contractor Installed Equipment. 3.04 CLEANING, PAINTING AND FINISHES A. Provide protective finishes on all materials and equipment. Use coated orcorrosion-resistant materials, hardware and fittings throughout the Work. Prior to installation, paint all bare untreated ferrous surfaces with rust-inhibiting paint. B. Clean all surfaces prior to application of adhesives, coatings, paint or other finishes. 20 October 2010 26 0000 - 3 ELECTRICAL (DESIGN /BUILD) tgba -Project #08062.02 Providence Timeshare Clinic ' Yelm MOB C. Provide factory-applied finishes on equipment wherever possible. D. Protect all finishes and restore any damaged finishes to their original condition. E. Reference: Section 09 9000: Painting for paint specs. 3.05 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Electrical work and equipment shall be protected against damage. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective. B. Electrical equipment shall be kept covered or closed to exclude dust, dirt, and splashes of plaster, cement or paint, and shall be free of all such contamination before final inspection. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition and free of rust, scratches or finish defects. If damaged, shall be properly refinished in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.06 CUTTING, DRILLING AND PATCHING A. Coordinate access openings required for electrical equipment and raceways. Confirm acceptable locations with the Architect and Structural Engineer prior to cutting. B. DO NOT cut, drill or weld to metal building components without express written direction from the Architect or Structural Engineer. C. Access openings required after pouring of concrete shall be made at the Contractor's own expense. D. After using access openings, restore surfaces to original integrity tot he satisfaction of the Architect. 3.07 LIGHTING SCHEDULE A. See Light Fixture Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION 20 October 2010 26 0000 - 4 ELECTRICAL (DESIGN /BUILD) Highligi;ts • Flexible, open-architecture design is scalable for future computer equipment upgrades • Comfortable, ergonomic data entry- work sitting or standing with ergonomic 20" (51 cm) lift adjustment • Five-inch (13 cm) LCD height adjustment ergonomically accommodates average range of users • Extremely easy-to-clean design promotes infection control • Barcode scanner holder provides easy access to hand-held scanner • Extends/retracts LCD and keyboard up to 39" (99 cm); fold equipment back out of the way when not in use. With the keyboard folded up, total system depth is as little as 12" (30,5 cm) • Ergonomic back-tilt keyboard tray with left or right mouse tray ensures wrists remain in a neutral position during data entry • Maintains the relative position of screen and keyboard throughout full range of motion • Clean, concealed and neat routing of cables through the expansive cable management system • Universal CPU Holder (silver) size range: 2-8" (5-2D cm) wide; includes plastic spacer to accommodate most small form factor and ultra small farm factor CPUs Vertical Small CPU Holder (black) size range: l'/a" to 3'/~" (3,5-9,5 cm) wide; accommodates most small form factor and ultra small form factor CPUs e-08-089-EA www.ergotron.comAll nghts reserved Product Sheet ~~~. Ergotron° Wal!-mount ErvarkstatiQn with sinc~lo-motion adjustment Provides sit-to-stand vertical adjustment and articulation that maximizes patient-caregiver interaction. Maintains the relative position of the screen throughout the full range of motion. Keyboard tray extends up to 39" (99 cm) and folds up 90° for total clearance of approximately 12" (30,5 cm). Optional 18" (46 cm) extender arm increases range of motion for even greater reach. EI~G `~ StyleO/ie~ir `' H~ ~~ 1 Integrated keyboard tray with right/left mouse tray z Fold-down keyboard tray with built-in mouse pad surface 3' Adjustable back-tilt keyboard tray (0° to -10°) 4, Integrated mouse and barcode scanner holders provide easy access 5 Optional 18" (46 cm) extender arm (45-255-216 or 45-255-200) increases range of motion for even greater reach `rz ~~ Patented CF lift-and-pivot motion technology provides premium 5" (13 cm) LCD height adjustment, portrait-to-landscape rotation and 30° tilt Durable, easy-to-clean exterior composed of aluminum, high-grade plastic and powder- coated painted steel `Weight Capacity: displdy =6-78 Ibs (2.7-E,2 kg); keyboard, mouse and harcade scanner = 5 Ihs (2,3 kg) "Litt flange, LC- and keyboard adjusts 15" (38 cm) in tandem; LCD adjusts 5" (13 cm) independently; maximum LCD height adjustment = 20" (51 cm) t Monitor up/down tilt = +25'/-5 Product Name Styleview HD Combo _ .. ~~,-~,,,,- ..~.n. ~no,,. . ~.w. _ -__ ...._ Part Numbers d5-215-2'16 (whne# 45-215-200 (biaokj Product Includes HC? Corntm Arm, wail mount bracket, heitght- adjustabje t.CD mount, wrst rest- scanner and mouse holder, integrated keyboard tray with Jett! right mouse tray, ttandle, manual, VEfiA-monitor mounting kit. cable ties Shipping Dimensions 1~""H x 2{3°1N x 24`D (305 x 5d8 x 8tb rnm} Shlpping Weight 25 ibs (11.3 kg} _.. v Warranty 5 years Weight Ca¢acity' 4isptay frT13 tbs 12.7-13.2 kr~?, keyboard, mouse.. and barcode scanner 5 Ibs (2.3 kg) _. Compatible Display(s) Almost any vESA compliant maniror up to 24° vESA FDMI, MIS-Q, 75lt f30, C (hole patterns 100 x 100 mm and 75 x 75 mm) © 2010 Ergotron, Inc. rev. 08/19/2010 e-OS-089-EA Content is subject to change without notffication Product Name Part Numbers Product Name Part Numbers Americas Sales and Corporate Headquarters ____ EMEA Sales _ APAC Sales _ Worldwide OEM Sales St. Paul, MN USA Amersioort, The Netherlands Tokyo, Japan __ www.ergotron.COm (8001888-8458 +31 33 45 45 600 www.esgotron.com ilda.oem@ergotron.com +1-651-681-7600 www.ergotron.com apaccustomerservieeC)ergotron.com www.ergotran.com info.eu@ergotron.com sales@eryotron.com ~~ i 9 Extends/retracts LCD and keyboard up to 39" (99 cm)', fold equipment back out of the way when not in use. With the keyboard folded up, total system depth " is as little as 12 (30,5 cm) ~rhite) . _ . - alaok} 1& {Wt14tQ} `oo (black} _ HD Extender 1 r s~ Clean, concealed and neat routing of cables through the expansive cable management system ~=~s~ Product Description flit lh E r„ ri7.?r E 7ialt~r,~I~~aVr'I~ti!ldi<t)r~Ci ftlud ~ ~iUi ~t_r(lkl ~ruJ teiESS r t I sl.rph~~li,zns Lvy I+I;h' t~tl! , r?mt t rr.lc c:r t1tcF rt ~t ant~l.~ btlE in ~ irf~:: -lsi, ~n sn.-t"t d,vrr<«~ f <71, it ? sit=z r;t r.Clnir~ nit~r~t~_ =t ~. ,ir ,f,Ir i~ ~ t. ~f ~ , it •~rl ,ted •jkn~l nhf i 1 „UI3h d !-.Ifr~~ f~ ~.?~ a [tE nNC', t1 ~,fli'~iC7~1) ~' fl l'i ~ ~ f P , C1 J JanYTfl f'rsatlc nrliirtfact~±C~7f"tittd{~tC~lpsra,l~}diCJtIUI Q~i(~PJ2,i.itC,~~4,Itr,H Ptif{c~IJr,r~1iC~ Performance Summary Utifz~ s Cree Tru2lNhite"°' Technology LR4E-15 - IUoderato recess LR4E-30 -Deep reress • `=u del~~der~ lumens • 51 ~ deli!-ered lumens • ~dominal b~put Power of 10.51~~ • I~ominal Input Power cf 11.1Vl~ •CCT = 2700K o• 3`OOK •CCT = 2700K or 3500K •i:R1=90 •CRI-90 -nree Year Warranty • Three Year U\-arrni)~ r Qrriering information f~.~,m~~l~~ i~l~.~:fi~ls ,~~-~~<~ 13_t=t ~„~RL-i:;~•~r>7co35tP,rzt tz~rril~f~ntntstlril1~i11[>$t~,aioit~r~ ~h;_~ti ~ fir; ~ ~GFn,.,a~r_tlf~rb~., ~•: N4usin~ Light Engine Reflector H~ [R4E'~S __alti.~Jt.~~1ar,~pr~.,c, h. ~4-75A-~"'+'j?l;.tr;zr~,~~. ai'J" ,a_~s,:1;.iNt1 1R4E-15C 1t~d t~~iuciPt~t~t~t- :- ~4ui;k LT4.30A l;••ts~:r~;:~ uil~~ -,at.~adri.°tl ER4L-30 trr•~ ueepiF,~ `C!~~t Standard 4oior O~~tlons (Inner reflector color with white paintedfla~ig~} -Rdci ieiR~rs trom (}claw to end ~>i descriptiot~~ i~u caivrs_ ft 14-15AP) Fot 61'H rernnve tt~e'A° tLC4-3D4NWi ~r }F,L~p:~r ~.,?h~~i. fi ; ~ ,~ ; az ~:~~ ,t :e; t t .. , 'rte ""'"" LR4 ,'- H4 LR4E-30 and LR4E-75 LT9-30A and LT4- I SA Cree TrueWhiter'" Technology • A bt tkt 1NaY 111 t'1~1~1af.^i1: v`te,tr liiAlli. ki~:6t u~ IiLc> ~ pat. ntLy°l)rtl"{1{t111 at1.'~J'Ft€7;~'Mlh)YJ,ir(i~wTU~~t+'L7It,?{7 LE(}*., • ~11P'et1 tij.Cll)1lnl~.l i ~71r1f p,l'>T, bCEJ'k :l1 j3tttCrit (rtk)1111dC;:di1F~n1°r}~ S~;CP'r~ n)dirtldltl=COIC~ ~t~3Si+tt'r1C tjser tin1~>.~n~'i [f'r11Ek~ratu'E' (JF+ ~~rlE•Cl'i. (del `Q,;li~t1 ~,4tr`-sr~(11T1,~'r1Cfl"4atlr ~,St ~ii, QC nrt1dl11Jfnrnt?irk~k.li Construction ;Iijps 11t Ytira t' GP[(1rL f. ~ ! .! «','i,1 ~trt.iAtt c'1 Ura (' r`~Iantl ~~nrirk t U(1~jri~, ~ntci(R x r`rutleti ~auminurri L'ca' tk~,r-t1t'"r;~, 2_ l~r t., engine vt~i`h r tenvon nl+~~ tiarli>rh ~, ArC1lEtF~Ck111ai R:'''(?CL.,~ • ~t.r~tEle` r17id rL~(Nr~rfx.tl~ t r1,,~tirl ~.t+t~ a"ytrllt`~t~t ap,lrlli I1Pfi 41n~ sl;li~lhlr~ ft~r ir,. ~~(~ tied i± rltl ~- `=,l~i .t. ri (r`•ilir • In ~~grul-t'd tklt rrn,i ^'-„rlagl ~~~k'ut v~`crr°. ~1~11duct~ t1[ r,'J+`a}" trr;rr~ I FL~ ~;rld 'l~~ tlcia 1t t ,tip; c4.rrsr,,,` ,1~r,~ ~IlvirtirRrrlera LFLjtlttftCrE~l~-7^tlF~l~ttzl'eituwl~'iG'7a s~PCkftP~~ I11~Xt1ri~17t` E C=r, volt„n Ir-aali~?t~ iii ot`I% in tJlrrF~~ri vdlrli t! ^"~~F'r~`tlr~ ~ E<x t-c~ri t)~. ~t ar'~Ite* ~ C"r Optical System • }'~r"°Cr~t tarp u(lUt:~l <yk.i~ m Utah<e ~ ,ii~GGtse it7titb r~sifCt"~+.~!`:irFtlrelra'~'ivC~prirb~IC.C}nlpO'°Enr r.3~;C un41Ur"r t'CtYrf(trtdbit` ?C~p~al"a"t ~ ~ixri~lt ;;^" dnC1 viw,~ «t ear <ti~<alkit°u l tt ~ Lr~ ttl3«~m;;i~el. . ~ n~rer rPfrt'C tc~r \a~li r: ,l e' ~;K~r,riure. q"rtma~r~"11, 'tt)!r-G~[~t"e'CDr~(1 rpf''ltlltt i13pP'ii!drs[P t~r'IYI i7rTlti i' L~it1k~ I~r'tip ~rt~~dt~@ electrical System • irti .~ I hlilh ~h'l u~rx" (firEVr^ ,i~tn f~l'svcr =~,q"~,i," f~i;t~/~ ','lupttlvi,lk<~tY; i[{11lr•(}I11 - 1?imrrlabiN tcl :'l3~h. tivith moat ir~Cvnrie~~~! t anc t C}ICI ItIiL'r~ iIClElenrF YVlh~N:: rttLE~U!(~"it#Tit.C~~rTl (pri~Cf7rY1 yuiarury ana vurur-rary uuauncaaQns I;~ ~ r ; :e~ t1 l r i ~f' t~~ ~ ~t t=~''d~rti^ )L.itdx~h , c:~itnl, Inc~tic?""s I ~~ ~, r!~ C~<,tl ,~~ <<; 1 ':Ir~"<~ iuriiE t11°:a.r k1n"~a~a,~- re~Un r ~rr,~r_,< ~u~tallle f:~1 i1°=.viti*,rcl t r c,` °r"~~ulctr.:1 ~:etiFna:= Rf<<1~1ht ?r:•~;-u:~tml~ i~_r~C~rl.~ntt .v'{r~A~lf.~IT~~T Photometry H4 LR4E-50 LT=+-'OA Intensity (Candlepower) H= t R4L-15 LT4- I `A Intensity (Candlepower) ITLTestA59a~5 Summary ITLTest#`05ot Summary ANGLE EA CP ' ANGLE_.__. MEA,(V CP %'_ _ _ i {3 ~Cr2 ~ ~~ 0' X78 S' 357 S" 373 ~ ~,~\ 25` 266 35" t$1 \' ,~'~~ ~: 25` 278 35' 200 t 4s 109 ~~ ... 45" 114 .,- . ~` 65' 18 '~ \ 65' 19 ~ --- t' ~i~S'~ t as o '~ i 75` t " ss o Zonal Lumen Summary Zonal Lumen Summary ZONE LUMENS %LAMP 4SFL ZONE _,k,. NS %LAMP ~:..1~ ~~ 0'-40` 314 76.9 76.9 0°-40 383 70.9 7'-~.~i fJ`-6b` ~4~ '9~.$ 98.8 ~"+ ;';``J'~'~$ '' 9i; 0`-90` 515 100.00 lUO.W 0`-90' s40 100.00 100.ut~~ J Installation • Recessed hou=lnq srsith mtegr l nailer a ~e!Iwy grid artacl~rnCnt detoil Integral ^angers accommodate spans fren I ~i- •Aojustublebarhangerbrak~i,~r~~.~~ ". r~argcrs from slidinn duri~ ~, ~ ~ I ^olds position once install • Integral t-bar attachmen~ c ,~, wspendetl ceiln~g'o support ;r,,~w, • Dimensions: h ~° ~~:~ = 8-?/,'" L -1 • A:rommodates c cling thlcmess fro ~ !~ t~, ~ . Adjustable bar hnnc~er Brake 4 w.h 3wxing Workplar•e Wm0 Nlumnunre IIWTIMU~rRP r3A 6R4E-1~ 6Tn-7 to 14,1 S,G 65w Ra;ip YVkNn Baf%e t4.0 63 i6rl eft 9'Anr>Wzvd 1'6.2 S_q 44n~, PA.RY'?S'Wlnta £iM hfle 13.6 37 Neer, 1 " . 1. . of K ~F:u ~inp q r d'Syqun<3 6 SPsc~n.~ Workpiane Wxfl Wa'kprane Wall W ork~lano 1Na1! ~H[tknnlR'P r~{(IfhKtmlCt •h{NYINN{15~$ MlNllllY~CP b N{~~1)~1(1.' ~UM(ndtlCR 19.8 1G.7 ?F3 t1 tw ~.n ;r-l •, Aea-ion 123 46 18.7 &6 2S 1 t 2 6 = ds~ easo ww~e tiafn~ 11-0 L3 11:9 7.5 .31:.3 ) 1.7 t ?t.~ K:Yi. C' Arrodized 19.1 4S i9_b S.0 29.0 R4 ~ 4ctvu tktse.arr ~°wtl~nn B.dfl~~ 13.1 1? s 1Jo1cs' , , h~~ n+~ r;a, 9 X...,K ly Nl e w• ~ '~ t ° °„#4"... #l.fAra« . :r , .e 8 Spax~nq vG'Si^d chH) Vlnrkplano WaN atb>lane W Wall OIiYfYtldMC WVi1Md11CP N ~1 TtUM~I{4d MUmItd~llY s,a as 7s 2.a 4.1 4A 7.7 3,2 10.9 s.4 a.~ ?.e 9.7 7;1 b,0 15 ~'r ,..w..l 3 I ...,: d _ 4 pia=fix ". <:.. S d I~ O l:af,lltt~~ \untl77•r: I'~ l..•: I'rnjrr•t: 1; ~! II'•.t. 11~nnn',iil ur nu~n~~l~~iint nunnuin, lurtliurl, nlirt:, Ilr~iltilitc in ;.il~l~lirati~~u~. \II In~nlnrt- iurlu~lr ;t'tt~ rloruiral r~~nl ~~Ilirli rain Lr {i~ IJ atlfn<u•~I l.. Ilir ~Ir-irrJ Irii_Ili. 11'S21iA lzii • .. k I'ulr~,lrr lit~~xJrr rn;ltin~! i~ili•r~ ,nuintli ,alin fini~h ~~itll r~rrliliunal tlur;iltilitt. I.inr ~i~ha_r lu•nilnnl rnnl~ nrr rh~nr.ilirnn. I.~~~~ ~~~l;i! r r~n'tl~ urr la'uirlrtl alinuiniini. i.i.'. •• Inrli~iilnall~ nunuli hht~~ii I~,nri~lu•an 1hi~~. 1~ii' Ieuilaltlr in liar 7~~II,~r. Imt 7nllo~r :nnf rniiiluirt (hlnrr,rrnr I'nr c•rt,r ul trt:elrlritt!~ wltrr lielil ,~nn~rr- in Iln~ :yy~lir,ui~ni. t.1.1~~ i;i11i~,:,t3••.~ ~I:hlla C1..1ti~ i r, a ~: $$~1Yf ~3 a`~ ~t4 5 °3 ~ u .° ~t a Y r'; ~t_ RPf~ l ~~i 1\,i I\{? ~\ I I J.UlP (iu7•lurlrrl~ 111'I°1~1(:l': ~IOl~V'I-I\G I l;\RI>11:11i1: I'I\Itil f TX740 -line voltage GR- green Line Voltage lamps R -Rail mount * A -aluminum TX740LV -low voltage2 AM- amber G9C -G9 clear 40 M - Monopointt B -black TX740CF -compact RD- red G9F -G9 frosted fiuorescent ~LV11H- white BL- blue Low Voltage lamps ~GYC -GY 6.35 clear 35 7. Monopoint mount comes complete with canopy GYF -GY 6.35 frosted X50 suitable for attachment to junction box. 2. Low Voltage supplied with electronic transformer. Compact Fluorescent lamp G23 -2 pin 2700k 5 ' ~ ~ ` ~ ~ 776 Snulh Green St.. Tupelo. MS Omega Lighting reserves thr right t 38804 Phone fi62.842.7272 FAX 662.847.5507 wwa~sofishght o make rhangrs without nrrtrre.6??2008. Rev.7~08 ing.com www.dcolighling.com `~ J{ ~ '~ 7 _ O..cgr, ls,, asp '_ pr~i'~as ~ o ~. -n~ ~^ l ~ L.~ ~J i, ~ ~ i, 1 LINE ~ ~~"`~`""~ ~ _ VOLTAGE ..,,, ' ~Wr" LOW ,;_ ~--- ~~ ,~.. ,~ .<1 VOLTAGE ~=='~3xx~~~,= ~~=tea !i 111 11t}~ V~I~I~Af; ~l~•~~I'lff11~ '! ::; "-_ ('ABLE KIT TX245A Cabe kit alu~~linuni 7X2456 Cube kit. black 10' f;rc;~a. yield ad;u~ia6le SLOPED CEILING ADAPTER TX235A Sloped adapter. aluminum 7X2356 Sloped adapter. h#acl: A.~,:i is late,=~oi,eig ar nG'd ~Ifit*i `o- s,1~pF~-ceiling ;,ppli_ationr Rail is hand bendable. Bending Tool is also available. TELE~COP#NG STEN TX250A 3"-G"- aluminum 7X2506 3"-G". r;an< TX255A 6"- I?", aluminum 7X2556 6"- IJ". hlr,ck TX260A 12°-24" aluminum 7X2606 12'-24'- utack TX263A 24"-48`. a#uminum 7X2636 ?4"-48". black `l Li ~ - 1 ,7 776 South Grzen St_ Tupelo. MS 38804 Phone 662.842.7212 FAX 662.841.5501 www.caprilighting.com www.dcolighting.com Omega Lighimg reserves the right to make changes without nutice.'~2008. Rev.7/08 TX240A Walt bracket. aluminum 7X2406 Wali bracket. black _..~ >, _ R!GU STANDOFF TX247A 3" rigid standoff. aluminum 7X2476 5 rigid standoff, back $P,O~:a ~, :,'.I ~ ~i7~~T,8 )fiG' ryi~ Brisa~" Linear Bow Surface Mount FB3114E Page 1 of 1 Wall/Ceiling Mount T5 Fluorescent ADA Compliant 2S 5'16' 1643minl 1 16;16" 7 ? R" 14ynun h Ipniri 2 l i~16' I/tminl 1 1 3 S ~ 4 38'16" 412" O la4mml 111hmml L~ fl 1 Fixture Ordering Information (Single Lamp) Catalog No. Description Finish Wattage Volts Lamp fB3114E1 Linear Bow Surface Mount Satin aluminum 14W 120V (1i T5 F63114E2 Linear Bow Surface Mount Satin aluminum 14W 217V (1) T5 Diffuser Ordering Information Catalog No. Descri tion Finish Dimensions INominal) FBA3 Acrylic Bow Diffuser Opal 3" x 24" FBG3 Glass Bow Drffuser Opal 3" x 24" Features 1. Housing Sides and ends: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Back Pan: Stamped 18ga. (0.048") sheet metal. 3. Diffuser: Bowed opal glass or opal acrylic 4. Optics: Imernal white acrylic diffuser covers slots on housing sides and ends. 5. J-Box Covers: Die-cast split covers to enclose 4" octagonal J-Box {J-Box by others). 6. Fixture Mounting Plate: Stamped 18ga. (0.048") sheet metal. Mounting Fixture mounts directly to 4" octagonal junction box. Dctagonal junction box mounting requires use of "J-Box Covers" and "Fixture Mounting Plate" sup- plied standard. Electrical 7. Ballast Electronic 120V & 277V Voltage 120V _Total Input Watts _ 28W Max. Line Current IAmps) ~ O.ZOA Power Factor '_ ~ 0.90 THD~ _ ~ <34°0 Min. Starting Temp ~ -20°F, -30 C 8. Luminaire-Ballast Disconnect: Meets t` and CEC Disconnect Requirements. Lampholders Fluorescent Mini Bi-Pin, G5 Base 277V __...._._......- 28W O 11 A 0.90 __- 34°0 _. _~_2D F 30°C EC 410.13DIG) Camping (by others) General Electric Osram/Sylvania Philips It) 14W T5 Linear Fluorescent ', F14W/T5/'/ECO FP14/' F14T5/"/ALTO `Manufactures Color Temperature Designation Finish Satin Aluminum. Labels cULus Listed. Suitable for Damp Locations. Type: Job Name Cat. No.: Lamp(s): Notes Lightalier a Genlyte company www.lightoliercom 631 Airport Road, Fall River, MA 02720 • i5D81679-8131 • Fax (508) 674-471 D We reserve the right to change details of design, materials and finish. ©2007 Genlyte Group LLC • 0907 1 V~ ~' 1 1 I L..~ u I 1 I~ L/THON/A L/GNT/NG' FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS INTENDED USE - RT8S is designed for applications that require the ex- tremely energy efficient delivery of comfortable volumetric light from alay-in fixture that is appealing and shallow in depth and where room-side ballast access is required. Ideal for offices, schools, hospitals and numerous other commercial applications. Certain airborne contaminants can diminish in- tegrity of acrylic. Click here for Acrylic Environmental Compatibil~ table for suitable uses. OPTICAL SYSTEM -Delivers volumetric lighting by filling the entire volume of space with light, providing the ideal amount to walls, cubicles, work sur- faces and people. Luminous characteristics are carefully managed at high angles, distributing just enough intensity to deliver the volumetric effect. 98% reflective Alanod M1R0® silver optical assembly efficiently redirects lamp output to the refractor. Regressed refractive system obscures and softens the lamp and smoothly washes the reflector with light. Linear faceted reflector softens and distributes light into the space and minimizes the luminance ratio between the fixture and the ceiling. Mechanical ctrt-off across the reflector and tresnel refraction along the refractor provide high angle shielding and a quiet ceiling. Sloped endplates provide a balanced fixture to ceiling ratio while enhancing the perception of fixture depth. CONSTRUCTION -Rugged, steel reflector with embossed facets. Painted after fabrication. Fixtures may be mounted end-to-end. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM -High-efficiency, CEE qualified, instant-start, < 10% THD, universal voltage and sound rated A are available as quick-ship items. Optional program-start and step-dimming ballasts available. Designed and optimized for use with CEE (Consortium far Energy Efficiency) qualified, high-lumen, long life T8 lamps and energy-efficient electronic ballasts. MAINTENANCE -Lamps accessed by unlatching trim and allowing it to hinge open tar easy maintenance. Ballast is accessed from below by re- moving channel cover. Catalog Number Notes Type 0 Specifications -~-- T Lenyth: 48 (1218) ~ / _ , . \ ~/ \ \\~. ~ Width: 24 (610) ~ w t Depth: 3-3/16 1811 All dimensions are inches (millimeters) unless otherwise specified. LISTING - UL Listed to U.S. and Canadian standards. WARRANTY -Fixture guaranteed for one year against mechanical defects in manufacture. Lamp and ballast system warranty (36 months for lamp, 60 months for ballast) by lamp and ballast manufacturer. Protected by one or more of US Patents Nos. 7,229,192; D541,467; D541,468; D544,633; D544,634; D544,992; D544,933 and additional patent pending. NOTE: Specifications subject to change without notice. ORDERING INFORMATION For shortest lead times, configure product using standard options {shown in bold). Example: 2RT8S 2 32 MVD~T BINP 1835HT8 2RT8S 2 32 Series Number of Voltage 2RT8S lamps 347 2 MVOLT' Trim type (blank) Lay-in Wattage grid 32 32W T8 F Over- (48~~) lapping flanged NOTES: 1 MVOLT slandard for 12t)V-277V applications. 2 CEE qualified HPT8, NEMA premium ballast to qualify for many utility rebates. 3 Not available with 347 volt. 4 Must specify voltage, 120 or 277. 5 For use with standard ballast. 6 For use with step-dimming ballast. Ballast BILP IS, high efficiency, .78 bf (low-z BINP IS, high efficiency, .88 bf (normal)z GEB101S IS, .88 ballast factor BIHP IS, high effi- ciency, 1.20 bf (high)z BSNP PS, step-dimming, high efficiency, .68 bf Inormall" Lamp= Dpiions L835HT8 3100 GLR Fast-blow fuses lumen, EL Emergency battery pack long life, ° (see Life Safety sectionl K 3500 EL14 Emergency battery pack LP735 2800 (see Life Safety section) lumen, 3500°K PWS1836 fi' prewire, 3/S" diameter, 18-gauge, 3-wiress PWS1846 6' prewire, 3/8" diameter, 18-gauge, 4-wiresb QFC_ Quick-flex fixture cable, factory installed prewired cable 1RELOC"')° Fluorescent Sheet #:2RT8S-2x4 2RT8S Volumetric Recessed Lighting 2' x 4' MOUNTING DATA Continuous row mounting of flanged units requires CRE and CRM trim options Isee Options!. G i ~ ~.„ "„. I ~I ~ ~' I ~;. Lay-in Grid (exposed or concealed grid) ~'I ~ '' ~ ._~.. F , ~ ~ I ~ .~ ~~ , -- Overlapping Flanged Trim with swing-gate hangers NOTES: 1 Recommended rough-in dimensions far F-trim fixtures 24"x48" (Tolerance is +1/4"-0"I. Swing-gate range 1-3/16" to 3-15/16". Swing-gate span 23.3/8" to 26-11/16" Fixture swing-gate paints require additional 1-1/16" over nominal fixture height. T8 Energy Comparison System Lamp 8a/last Input Watts Saved Type factor Watts Compared to 3 lamp TS 3-lamp T8 Parabolic F32T8 0.88 85 - 2RT8S 2-lamp BINP TS F32T8 0.88 55 30 2RT8S 2-lamp BILP T8 F32T8 0.78 48 37 PHOTOMETRICS 2RT6S 232, (3) F032 lamps, 28flfl lumens per lamp, s/m 1.281a1ongy 1.41across), test no. LTL18481 CP Summary 0° 90 0" 1490 1490 5` 1507 1464 15° 1459 1461 25° 1362 1430 35° 1198 1352 45° 975 1215 55° 707 1017 65° 438 648 75° 205 208 85° 35 20 90 0 0 Coefficients of Utilize' pf 20% pC 80°'0 70% pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 0 96 96 96 94 94 94 1 88 84 81 82 79 77 2 80 73 68 72 67 63 3 73 64 58 63 57 52 ~ 4 67 57 50 56 49 44 ~ 5 61 51 43 50 43 38 6 56 46 38 45 38 33 7 52 41 34 41 34 29 8 49 38 31 37 30 26 9 45 34 28 34 28 23 10 42 32 25 31 25 21 ion 50% Zonal Lumen Summary 50%30%10% Zone Lumens % Lamp % Fixture 90 90 90 0° - 30° 1198 21.4 26.5 79 77 74 0° - 40° 1997 35.7 44.2 69 65 61 0° - 60° 3630 64.8 80.4 61 56 51 0° - 90° 4515 80.6 100.0 54 48 44 90° - 180° 0 0.0 0.0 48 42 37 0° - 180° 4515 80.6 100.0 43 37 33 39 33 29 36 30 26 33 27 23 30 25 z1 Efficiency: 80.6% 'The LER ILuminaire Efficacy Rating) is the lumens per watt rating for this fixture. It is used to compare the energy efficiency of various products. This photometric report is based upon IES testing procedures, as stated in LM 41-1998. J i -, I~ L/T,f~/ON/A L/GHT/NG` An ~~4cuity8rands Company Sheet #:2RT8S-2x4 ©2010 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 9!27/10 Lithania Lighting , Fluorescent One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone:800-858-7763 Fax:770-929-8789 www.Iithonia com firing ice: ONE-CLICK TERMINATION FOR LOWER INSTALLED COST AND MORE PROFITABILITY. L'1 ~e ~dc. designed to be better. Pass & Seymour ~b~ PlugTaif" Move your complex tasks to the front of the project. At rough-in, install the pre-stripped leads of a P&S PlugTail connector instead of pigtails. At device installation, click in the connector and tighten the mounting screws -done in less than a minute. ~c , r Your productivity gains begin at rough-in. Instead of making pigtails, simply connect the ' pre-stripped P&S PlugTait Connector leads. In one simple step, you're ready for fast, easy device installation at any time. ' Device installation takes less than a minute. Just plug the connector into the P&S PlugTait device. no preparing, stripping or looping the conductors no taping terminals 1 no mistakes resulting in rework or callbacks A faster, more reliable installation. P&S PlugTail installation is three times faster than conventional device installation -saving you the most time at the end of the project when you're ' fighting completion pressure. With no exposed terminals, you can power-up and test a circuit at any time once the connectors are installed. Whether the work is done by a first-year apprentice or by your most experienced installer, every P&S PlugTail device will be installed correctly. Happier installers. Happier customers. Because P&S PlugTail installation's a lot easier on the knees and fingers, your installers benefit. And because it delivers dependability, quality and easier, safer service for years to come, your customers benefit, too. Get all the details. See P&S PlugTail -only at your P&S distributor. And visit www.passandseymour.com/plugtail to see our video and case histories. When it's time for finish wiring, just remove the plastic wrapper. Connect the P8S PlugTail device with just one click. Mount the device to the box -and you're done. ~~ ' ~,; ~~ . . ~~Sl"~w° Healthcare facilities need maximum dependability. They can't afford to be without acircuit - or even a receptacle -for long. They need fast device change-out. Patient and staff safety is essential. All of which makes P&S PlugTail" ideal. ~.: z ~ . ~ • R ~ ~ ~ g ~: , ~& ,~ 9 s+Sa . p ~~; w,k;.. GFCI - Haspital Grade Tamper-Resistant ,.~~> ~~ Single Pole Toggle Switch ~t~c~~rt ~rttift~ti~~t Like healthcare institutions, colleges and universities demand premium Fed Spec solutions. Often, the academic calendar drives tight construction schedules. P&S PlugTail delivers everything you need. Government spending will drive intense competition. Contractors will be able to bid more competitively with the PlugTail offering. iM g '~'. .~:.. GFCI -Spec Grade Single Pole Isolated Ground Tamper-Resistant Toggle Switch Decorator Receptacles - Spec Grade Retail, Office ~ Entertainment Hespitality & Multiple Dwelling ' Developers face stiff competition -and have to Investors want new facilities open to take advantage of make and keep time commitments to demanding upcoming business opportunities. That means challeny- ' retail chains. They pass that time pressure along to ing deadlines. Even when installed by less-skilled labor, contractors through tight deadlines. P&S PlugTail P&S PlugTail's fast, consistently reliable installation can help you beat them. makes meeting them easy. :;~ t F ~*- rvF '~ • ~ • • t M I F t F a> r; ;~, Duplex GFCI - Decorator Decorator Receptacles - Spec Grade Receptacles - Receptacles - Spec Grade Spec Grade Spec Grade Isolated Ground t c ' r ~ r` ~ ,~ ~ :~ S 1 ~~ ~ '~ Decorator Decorator Switches - LED NightlightlGFCI Decorator Switches - Receptacles - Spec Grade Comhination - Spec Grade ^ Spec Grade Spec Grade i l~" al, Healthcare and instruction Projects. 1 Extra Heavy-Duty Hfa~~it~i Grade Receptacles o Circuit label on face allows permanent circuit identification - an exclusive, patented feature. a~- Heavy-gauge, solid-brass strap. Receptacle connector features large brass terminal blades for durable connections. Hospital Grade GFCIs Tamper-resistant models provide the only single-device solution to meet NECK' requirements for pediatric care areas. LED makes it easy to spot a tripped condition. LED Nightlight/GFCI Combination provides added safety -ideal for bathrooms. r~i ~I L~ e Uniquely illuminated receptacle model is perfect for emergency-circuit applications. i~ ii Extra Neav}~-(duty S~~~itchec. a Available in 120/277 and 347V solutions. rr Receptacle connector features large brass terminal blades for durable connections. e Glass-reinforced nylon back body. One-piece nickel-plated strap. ;~ Spec Grady Switches a Shallow design for easier installation. Illuminated solutions for pilot and lighted applications. e No exposed parts for finger-safe application. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Spec Grade Receptacles & Switches ~ No exposed terminals -increases safety in all phases of installation and use. u: Tamper-Resistant Receptacle models ensure child safety. Heavy-gauge, plated-steel strap wraps around body and face to form a rigid structure. Auto-ground clip ensures grounding or provides redundant grounding in pipe- and-wire applications. Available in 120/277 and 347V solutions. Spey t:~r~~e GFC:i~ SafeLock'" Protection shuts off power if there's a ground fault or if the GFCI fails. The most durable GFCI available -exceeds UL''943 voltage requirement; survives 100X the required UL 3kA/6kA voltage surge test cycles. ~± Meets 2006 UL and Fed Spec requirements. GFCI available in combination with an automatic sensor LED nightlight for added safety and convenience. II u II 1 1 P&S PlugTail Power'" Pre-Fabricated Wiring System Both floor and wall bracket systems are pre- assembled in one unit to save time on-site in repetitive wiring applications. Each includes: P&s PlugTail right angle push-in connector for instant connection of additional conductors. Pre-mounted steel wall box, single- gang or two-gang. r Pre-mounted mud ring available in 5/8" or 3/4° rise. ae Pre-installed P&s PlugTail Connector for one-click termination. P&S PlugTail Tester Enables users to quickly test installed receptacles and, unlike other testers, connectors as well. ~ ~ ~ ,~; d a r i~. e s P f, ~ ~~ _ , +~' PlugTail Power floor brackets slide under the sill plate and establish an 1 B-inch mounting height automatically with no measuring and screw directly to the studs. P&S PlugTail Metal-Box Kii Metal-box solutions feature pre-installed P&S PlugTail Connectors. With the ground wire pre-mounted to the box and the mud ring factory-installed, this solution will reduce waste and time on the job. At device-out, remove the P&5 PlugTail poly-bag protection and install the device. P&S PlugTaiE'" Receptacles ,a- .,,,. ~ 1 ! ~'. ~. ~~ -E' 1 7 a:,.~ ~~ ~ M s 1 t R 1 .~.~ *~$.n ' Ratings NEMA Catalog Number Description A. V. Config. No. Speciticatio n Grade Rece tacles _ p _ . . -~ PT5262A* . _ _ 15A 125V _ 5-15R ^ -- Extra Heavy-Duty PT5362A' 2UA 125V 5-ZOR PTTR62* i5A 125V 5-15R Extra NPavy-Duty -Tamper-Resistant PTTR63* 2UA 125V 5-2UR PT26252* 15A 125V 5-15R Decorator PT26352" 20A 125V 5-20R PTIG26262* 15A 125V 5-15R Decorator -Isolated Ground PTIG26362* 70A 125V 5-20R PT5262* 15A 125V 5-15R Duplex -Fed Spec Grade PT5362* 20A 125V 5-20R PTIG5262• 15A 125V 5-15R Duplex -Isolated Ground PTIG5362* 20A 125V 5-20R Hospital Grade Reteptact~s PT8200" _ Extra Heavy-Duly 15A 125V _ 5-15R PT82001L* Extra Heavy-Duty -Illuminated 15A 125V 5-15R PT8300* Extra Heavy-Duty 20A 125V 5-20R PT63001L" Extra Heavy-Duty -Illuminated 20A 125V 5-20R PTTR62H* 15A 125V 5-15R Extra Heavy-Duty -Tamper-Resistant r PTTR63H* 20A 125V 5-20R PT26262HG* 15A 125V ~i-15R -,-~, . ,, PTi_n3G2f-G' 20A 125V 5-ZOR PT1595' PT2D95• ~ Duplex -Fed Spec Grade 15A 125V 20A 125V 5-15R 5-20R PT1595NTLTR' Tamper-Resistant LED 15A 125V 5-15R PT2095NTLTR• Nightlight Combination 20A 125V 5-20R PT1595TR* 15A 125V 5-15R Tamper-Resistant PT2095TR* 20A 125V 5-20R PT1595HG* PT2095HG• Duplex 15A 125V 20A 125V 5-15R 5-20R PT1595HGNTLTR* Tamper-Resistant LED 15A 125V 5-15R PT2095HGNTLTR' NighUtghl Combination 20A 125V 5-20R PT1595HGTR* 15A 125V 5-15R Tamper-Resistant PT2095HGTR* 2DA 125V 5-20R ra~~ rwg i an t e_sier PT-Tester ~ Red v&S PlugTail Tesler for Recc ptacles and Tails Third-Party Compliance cULus Listed, File Number E140596, Standard UL498, Federal 5pecificatton WC546 Catalog Number I Wire Length and Type I Catalog Number I Wire Length and Type PTRA65TR 6" Stranded THHN12 PTRS6STRBP b" Stranded THHN12 with Wagos PTRAbSOL 6" Solid THHN12 PTRSbSOLBP G" Solid THHN12 with Wagos PTRA6STRG b° Stranded THHN12 with fork terminal on Ihr ground U.S. Patent No. 6,994,585 *Color Designation Ivory W While GRY Gray BK Black BL Hlur RED R~~d LA lirli,t Almond 1. Blue only ar ~la~le in Spec Grade Duplex Receptacles ~. For Isolated Ground (IG) Receptad?5, no color d~:,ignation = Orange 3. For all other re[rptarla~,, nn color designation = Brov,-, P&S PlugTaii Power`" Pre-Fabricated Wiring Systems Catalog Number Single Gang Double Gang ~; Single Connector Two Connectors Description PSF1185825 PSF2185825 5/8" ring rice, Z-1/Z" wall depth PSF1185835 PSF2185835 5/e" ring rise, 3-1/Z" wall depth '` PSF1187525 PSF2187525 3/4" Tiny rise, 2-1/Z" will depth PSF1187535 PSF2187535 3/4° ring i i~;f^, 3 1/Z' wall depth r F[oar Bracket WiredAssemblies w~11- Sai d Copper Pigtails PSF51185825 «; PSF52185825 5/8" ring ri~:e, Z-?/Z" wall depth PSFS1185835 PSF52185835 5/B" ring rise, 3-1/Z" wall depth PSFS1187525 PSF52187525 3/4" ring rise, 2-1/Z" wall depth PSF51187535 ~~ PSF52187535 3/4" ring rise, 3-1/2" wall depth PSW15625 PSW25825 5/8" ring rise, 2-1/Z" wall depth PSW15835 PSW25B35 5/8" ring rise, 3-1/2" wall depth PSW17525 PSW27525 3/4" ring rise, 2-1/2" wall depth PSW17535 PSW27535 3/4" ring rise, 3-1/Z" wall depth PSW515825 PSW525825 5/8" ring rise, 2-1/Z" wall depth PSWS15835 PSW525835 5/8" ring rise, 3-1/Z" wall depth PSW517525 PSW527525 3/4" ring rise, 2-1/2" wall depth PSW517535 PSW527535 3/4" ring rise, 3-1/Z" wall depth E3oth~ waU and floor lzrscket prc~duct~> carne ~n cartoc,i, of i~,~enty. P&S PlugTaaf rc cc~i~tar.lr~s,~nti G~~1~:: colrt ~~ep~ratety, Metal-Box Kit Catalog Number i ~:~ Single Gang Double Gang Description _ ,,, Metal~~oxKifswi#hStranded C~-ppetPigtaits MB4SIPTSTR M8452PTSTR 4 Sq. 1-1/2" Metal Box, 5/8 MR, PTRA65TR MBD451PTSTR MBD4S2PTSTR 4 Sq. 2-1/8" Metal Box, 5/8 MR, PTRA65TR M64S15PTSTR M64525PTSTR 4 Sq, 1-1/2" Metal Box, 3/4 MR, PTRAGSTR MBD4S15PTSTR MBD4S25PTSTR 4 Sq. 2-1/8" Melal Box, 3/4 MR, PTRAGSTR F: ; MB4S1PTSOL M6452PTSOL 4 Sq. 1-1/2" Metal Box, S/8 MR, PTRAb50L ^" ~~ MBD451PTSOL MBD452PTSOL 4 Sq. 2-1/8" Metal Box, 5/8 MR, PTRA6SOL r;'-- ° MB4S1SPTSOL MB4S2SPTSOL 4 Sq, 1-1/2" Metal Box, 3/4 MR, PTRA650L MBD4515PTSOL MBD4525PTSOL 4 Sy. 2-1/8" Metal Box, 3/4 MR, PTRA6SOL ,~ ~' ;„1~ - „~ P&S PlugTail devices are available preinstalled in WiremoldlLegrand Prewired Raceway -which installs in one-third the time of conduit wiring. „::=, ~ gym;" ;~°" '-III a' P&S PlugTail`" Switches ` `. Toggle Style z ~ Cat. No. Color Amp 5ingleFote Toggle-5wltches PT15AC1* * White, Ivory, Lidhi Almonri. Gr,,y, {ZFd, Brown, Black 15 PT15AC1 347 "` PT20AC1* ~ White, Ivory, Light Almond, Gray, Red, Brown, Black 20 ~ PT20AC1*347 .. __m_ . ~~ . _.__ _. _ _ " Three-Way Toggle Switches °: PT15AC3* White, Ivory, Light Almond, Grap, Red, Brown, Black 15 r PT15AC3*347 ~ `~ .. "' PT20AC3* a &, PT20AC3*347 White, Ivory, Light Almond, Gray, Red, Brown, Bl,~ck 20 single Fate Lightedfioggle Switches ~~- PT15AC1*SL ~ - 'S `` (,!tar, ivory, WI life, Bla*-k PT20AC1*SL 20 Three-Wa hted To Li le S hes it y g gg w c y' PT15AC3*SL 15 Clw,ir, h~ory, While. Black . PT20AC3*SL Designation I Ivor Y W White GRY Gray BK Black 20 C Clear *Color RED Red `' ~~ Decorator Style -Available June 1, 2009 LA Light Cat. No. Color Amp Almond e Singte Fole 13ecaratar Svtltches ~~ - Brown ' PT2601* l d G l W '„~ * f~U.E, Ivory. Lig ~i AI non rav, Rt~d, mown, R arr PT2621 20 Three-Way Decorator Switches ; ~ PT2603* 15 Wh~tq Ivory, Liylit Almond, Gray, Red, Brown, Bl<~ck v H PT2623* 20 °l ~ Single Pate tll~rninated Decoraitor Switches PT2625* While, Ivory, Light Almond, Black 20 ~ ~€ Three-Vitay Illuminated i3ecoratar Switches PT2626* White, Ivory. Light Almond, Black 20 t2g1277YAG:347YAC Connectors and Jumper Cat. No. Description Wire Colors `°~ P&5 ~lugTail Switch Right Angle Connectors ~' PTS65TR3 3-wits, (~'~ Stra glad 1HHPIl r~~m, B1aci,, 81at:k PTSb5TR3-277 3-wlre, G' Stranded THHN 12 for L77V dp~licatians Green, Brown, Brovan PTSbSOL3 3-wire, b" Solid THHN12 Green, Black. Black PTS650L3-277 3-wire, b" Solid THHN12 for 277V applications Green, Brown, Brown PT565TR4 4-wire, G" Stranded THHN 1[ Grec:n, Red, Red, Black PT565TR4-277 4-wire, 6" Stranded 7HHN12 for 277V applications Green, Brown. Yellow, Yellow PTS6SOL4 4-wire, h" Solid THHN12 Green, Red, Red, Black ~, PTSbSOL4-277 ' 4-vdire, 6` Staid THHN12 for 277V aoplication~, G-een, Brown, Yellow, Yellow ' ~ P~5 Pt~g~ait ~lum~er j4 PTJ PlugTail Tail cover for rough in PTJ5 Plug Tail Tail cover for rough in; 5-pack For additional technical or application-specific information, call 800-223-4185 or visit our website at v/ww.legrand.us/passandseymour. ~~ ,~ ~~~~ We're eager to put our expertise to work for you. I DIStClbuted by: Legrand/Pass & Seymour North America Headquarters P.O. Box 4822 60 Woodlawn Street Syracuse, NY 13221-4822 West Hartford, CT Ob110 80D-776-4035 Phone: 1.877.BY.LEGRAND 1295.3472) www.legrand.us/passandseymour Fax:1.8b0.232.2062 wvaw.legrand.us Legrand Canada 570 Applewood Crescent Vaughan, ON, L4K 484 Phone: 905.738.9195 Fax: 905.738.9721 www.IPgrand.ca